JP2016097090A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for improving the recognition of the presence or absence of a reservation memory.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises a first reservation display device 25A, a second reservation display device 25B, a first start winning storage display area 5HL, a second start winning storage display area 5HR, a first reservation display device 51A and a second reservation display device 51B. In the first reservation display device 25A, there is performed a first reservation display for displaying a first special drawing reservation storage number based on reservation data. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, a first reservation display is performed as in the first reservation display device 25A. In the first reservation display device 51A, a first reservation display is performed as in the first reservation display device 25A and the first starting winning storage display area 5HL. A second reservation display is performed in the second reservation display device 25B, the second startup winning storage display area 5HR and the second reservation display device 51B.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). Some display devices are configured so that they can be controlled in an advantageous state (hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (hit game symbol).

  As such a gaming machine, the main board (game control device) turns on an LED of a holding display (such as a special figure 1 memory display) provided in the lower right part of the game board and the like, and an effect control board There is a gaming machine in which the presentation control device displays the hold display symbol on the screen of the image display device (display device) so that the hold storage of the variable display that has not yet been started can be recognized (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2011-78825A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, an effect of moving an accessory so as to overlap the screen of the image display device, an effect of using the entire screen of the image display device, or the like is executed, and the on-hold display symbol on the screen is visually recognized. When it becomes difficult, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the presence / absence of reserved memory cannot be grasped from the reserved display controlled by the main board.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the recognizability of presence or absence of reserved storage.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of executing variable display (for example, variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols),
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process of FIG. 14),
Effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing effect control process processing in FIG. 24) for effect control based on information from the game control means (for example, an effect control command in FIG. 5);
Reservation storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, etc.) capable of storing as variable storage that has not been started yet,
The display is controlled by the game control means, and a specific hold display section (for example, the first hold display 25A and the second hold display) for displaying the hold memory (for example, the first hold display and the second hold display). 25B)
Image display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of displaying an image;
Provided in the image display means, the display is controlled based on information from the effect control means (for example, a command according to the effect control pattern, etc.), and a predetermined hold display unit (for example, a first hold display) for displaying hold memory 1 start winning prize memory display area 5HL and second starting prize memory display area 5HR),
Provided outside the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 1 and FIG. 2), the display is controlled based on information from the effect control means, and a special hold display unit (for example, a first hold display) for displaying hold memory 1 hold indicator 51A and 2nd hold indicator 51B),
It is characterized by providing.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the presence or absence of reserved storage.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
During execution of variable display, a corresponding display (for example, active display AH or active display frame AHW surrounding active display AH) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a predetermined area (for example, active display area AHA). Special image display means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S531);
During execution of variable display, when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed, the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect, the graphic group Y1 is The production before the collision with the active display, the production until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display in the second system change production), and the display mode of the corresponding display after executing the common production (For example, in the first system change effect, an effect in which one of the shapes “star” in the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to a star display mode, or a second system change effect) In the above, an effect that the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed. (Such as an effect that changes the display mode such as active display or active display frame) or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, any shape “star” in the active display) In the effect that the display form of the active display does not change and the display mode of the active display does not change before the figure "" collides, or the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame, and the active display frame An effect that does not change the thickness of the line, an effect that does not change the display state of one or both of the active display frame and the active display frame by executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect) Effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing an active display change effect),
Further comprising
Of a plurality of timings (for example, timing 1 to timing 4) during execution of variable display, the proportion of execution of the successful rendering differs depending on at which timing the common rendering is performed (for example, FIG. 31). reference),
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can pay attention to the execution timing of the common effect that notifies whether or not the display mode of the correspondence display changes. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
There is further provided a predetermined effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the rotation and light emission of the versatile lighter 54) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of rotating the versatile lighter 54 in front of the image display device 5).
When the display of the hold memory by the said predetermined hold display part is erase | eliminated with execution of the said predetermined | prescribed effect (for example, the 1st start prize storage display area 5HL and the 2nd start prize storage display area 5HR) (For example, when the LED is hidden by the light emission afterimage of the LED 545A), the display of the hold storage is maintained (for example, see FIG. 32).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, even if the display of the reserved memory in the image display unit is erased with the execution of the predetermined effect, the player can grasp the presence or absence of the reserved memory, and the player's misidentification can be suppressed. . Moreover, the freedom degree of production can be improved.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The special hold display section includes a plurality of light emitting means capable of light emission display (for example, LEDs 51Aa, 51Ab, 51Ba, 51Bb, etc. shown in FIG. 47),
The special hold display unit blinks the plurality of light emitting units synchronously when blinking the plurality of light emitting units (see, for example, FIG. 47).
It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the appearance can be improved while suppressing the control burden.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a production unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the light emission examples, such as a holding | maintenance indicator which a main board | substrate controls, and a holding | maintenance indicator which an effect control board controls. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning in effect control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 4th symbol control process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system | strain change effect execution. It is a front view of a production | presentation unit when the bar writer is rotating. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change effect execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of light emission of a holding | maintenance display in a modification, blink timing, etc. It is a figure which shows the blink timing of each LED of the holding | maintenance indicator in a modification. It is a figure which shows the blinking timing of the holding | maintenance display in a modification, and a 4th symbol display. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the modification. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning with the holding | maintenance display in a modification, and a 4th symbol display. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement | positioning with the holding | maintenance display in a modification, and a 4th symbol display.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Note that a winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. Further, a winning when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning combination). Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special figure display device 4A executes the first special figure game if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is equal to or smaller than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display (described later) executed on the image display device 5 (described later) is established. Further, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls that have passed (entered) the second starting winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning prize). If the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special figure holding memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second special symbol display device 4B executes the second special symbol display device 4B. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a graphic game (described later) or a variable display of decorative symbols (described later) executed in the image display device 5 is established. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number (also referred to as the first reserved memory number or the first reserved memory number) is a variable display game that is temporarily executed without being immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning prize ( This is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start prize. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. That is, the first special figure game (variable display) that has not yet started is stored as the first reserved memory until the first start condition is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number (also referred to as the second reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) is a variable display game that is temporarily executed without being immediately executed when the second start winning is generated ( This is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. That is, the second special figure game (variable display) that has not yet started is stored as the second reserved memory until the second start condition is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when there is no particular distinction between the first start prize and the second start prize, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. Further, the reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number”. When it is referred to as “the number of memories”, it may indicate any one or two of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  On the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B (specific hold display portion) ) Is provided. The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs. In the first hold indicator 25A, the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information) is displayed in an identifiable manner (the first hold memory is displayed). The first hold display is performed. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information) in an identifiable manner (displays the second hold memory). Second hold display is performed. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2, but the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided. The position of the hold indicator 25B is not limited to the right portion of the game area. The positions of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B may be, for example, an upper part, a lower part, a left part, a corner part, a predetermined part of the gaming machine frame 3, or the like of the gaming area. Further, for example, an LED for performing a hold display (an LED constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B) is different from the LED (for example, an LED for notifying an error). May be arranged (adjacent). In such a model (type of pachinko gaming machine 1), it is difficult to identify which LED is for holding display at first glance. As described above, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are located away from the central portion of the game area where the image display device 5 or the like is provided, or positions obscured by other indicators (LEDs). Therefore, the visibility is low and it is difficult for players to pay attention. On the other hand, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B, which will be described later, are provided at positions close to the image display device 5 and so on, so that the visibility is high and the player is likely to receive attention. .

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-type games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An effect unit 50 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The production unit 50 is attached to the game board 2. FIG. 2 is a front view of the effect unit 50. The effect unit 50 includes an image display device 5, an information display unit 51, a second lamp 52, a drive mechanism 53, and a versatile writer 54.

  The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to the symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). It should be noted that the variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily coincide with the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol, It suffices if the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR (predetermined hold display section) are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as with the first hold indicator 25A, the first special figure hold memory number (the number of first special figure games currently being executed) is displayed in an identifiable manner ( A first hold display (displaying the first hold memory) is performed. In the second start winning memory display area 5HR, like the second hold indicator 25B, the second special figure hold memory number (the number of second special figure games currently being held) is displayed in an identifiable manner ( The second hold display (displaying the second hold memory) is performed.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, the display area of the image display device 5 includes an active display area AHA (active display area, active display section, current display area, in addition to the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR, This time display area, current display part, digestion display area, digestion display area, digestion display part, etc.) are also arranged. The active display area AHA is provided, for example, between the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR. In the active display area AHA, when variable display is executed, a special image (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display is displayed. As an example, when the hold state of the first special figure game is canceled and the decorative symbol variable display is executed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved from the start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA. And display it as a special image. In addition, when the hold state of the second special figure game is released and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved from the start winning storage display area 5HR to the active display area AHA. Displayed as a special image.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The active display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special image includes an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed, an active display frame surrounding the active display, and the like. Note that the special image includes only active display and does not need to include an active display frame.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the information display unit 51 is provided on a center ornament near the upper side of the image display device 5. The information display unit 51 is a decoration of the image display device 5 and displays predetermined information so that the player can easily know the progress of the game. Note that the information display unit 51 may be provided in the vicinity of the lower side, the vicinity of the right side, the vicinity of the left side of the image display device 5, or a plurality of these. Further, the information display unit 51 may be provided so as to surround the image display device 5.

  The information display unit 51 includes a first hold display 51A (first special hold display), a second hold display 51B (second special hold display), a character display 51C, and a fourth symbol display 51D (variable display). Corresponding light emitting section), a fourth symbol display 51E (variable display corresponding light emitting section), and a display substrate 51K. As shown in FIG. 2B, the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the character indicator 51C, the fourth symbol indicator 51D, and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are provided on the display substrate 51K. ing. That is, the first hold display 51A, the second hold display 51B, the character display 51C, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E are arranged on a common substrate. Note that at least the first holding display 51A, the second holding display 51B, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E may be arranged on a common substrate. Further, the first hold indicator 51A and the fourth symbol display 51D and the second hold indicator 51B and the fourth symbol display 51E are arranged on different substrates, and the first hold indicator 51A and the fourth symbol display 51D may be arrange | positioned on a mutually common board | substrate, and the 2nd holding | maintenance display 51B and the 4th symbol display 51E may be arrange | positioned on a mutually common board | substrate. Alternatively, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B and the fourth symbol display 51D and the fourth symbol display 51E are arranged on different substrates, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B may be arrange | positioned on a mutually common board | substrate, and 4th symbol display 51D and 4th symbol display 51E may be arrange | positioned on a mutually common board | substrate.

  The first hold indicator 51A includes the same number as the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, for example, four LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad. As with the first hold indicator 25A and the first start-winning memory display area 5HL, the first hold indicator 51A displays the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) in an identifiable manner ( A first hold display (displaying the first hold memory) is performed. As an example, the four LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad constituting the first hold indicator 51A are arranged in a vertical line in the order of LED 51Aa, LED 51Ab, LED 51Ac, and LED 51Ad from the bottom. The first hold indicator 51A displays the first special figure hold memory number according to the number of LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad lit. For example, when the first special figure reservation storage number is “0”, all the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad are turned off. When the first special figure reserved memory number is “1”, only the LED 51Aa is lit, and when the first special figure reserved memory number is “2”, the LED 51Aa and the LED 51Ab are lit as shown in FIG. To do. When the first special figure reserved memory number is “3”, the LED 51Aa, LED 51Ab, and LED 51Ac are lit, and when the first special figure reserved memory number is “4”, all the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad are lit.

  The second hold indicator 51B includes the same number as the upper limit value of the second special figure hold storage number, for example, four LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd. As with the second hold indicator 25B and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, the second hold indicator 51B displays the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) in an identifiable manner ( The second hold display (displaying the second hold memory) is performed. As an example, the four LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd constituting the second hold indicator 51B are arranged in a vertical row in the order of LED 51Ba, LED 51Bb, LED 51Bc, LED 51Bd from the bottom. The second hold indicator 51B displays the second special figure hold memory number according to the number of lighting LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd. For example, when the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, all the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd are turned off as shown in FIG. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “1”, only the LED 51Ba is lit, and when the second special figure reserved memory number is “2”, the LED 51Ba and the LED 51Bb are lit. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “3”, the LED 51Ba, LED 51Bb, and LED 51Bc are lit, and when the second special figure reserved memory number is “4”, all the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd are lit.

  It should be noted that the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B are not arranged in a vertical row, but in a horizontal row, a diagonal row, or a vertical, horizontal, or diagonal row. May be arranged. Further, the order of arrangement of the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B may be opposite to the above order.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are closer to the image display device 5 than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. Is provided. That is, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than

  The character display 51C displays, for example, the current game situation and game description as a character string (message or the like), and includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix. . The character display 51C displays characters using, for example, a lighted LED and a non-lighted LED. If the character display 51C is an LED capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors (for example, an LED lamp (LED element) including an RGB (red green blue) diode, hereinafter, also referred to as a multi-color LED)), a character is displayed. Is displayed in color. The characters include numbers and symbols. For example, the character display 51C displays various information such as being super reach and being in a big hit gaming state. Depending on the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, what should be right-handed or left-handed (display of the launch direction) may be displayed. The character display 51C may be a display type display such as a liquid crystal display.

  The 4th symbol display 51D is comprised from LED (here multi-color LED) etc. The fourth symbol display 51D blinks (may be lit) in a predetermined color (for example, red) when the first special figure game is being executed. Thus, the 4th symbol display 51D displays the 4th symbol (it is expressed by blinking of the predetermined color of LED here) which shows that the 1st special figure game is being executed. It should be noted that at the timing when the variable display result of the first special figure game is derived, it may be lit in a color corresponding to the variable display result (for example, red for “big hit” and black for “losing”). Further, the fourth symbol display 51D lights up in a predetermined color (for example, red) when being controlled in the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result of the first special figure game being “big hit”. (It may be blinking). Further, the 4th symbol display 51D is composed of a plurality of LEDs, liquid crystal displays, etc., and the 4th symbol display 51D is a variable display of predetermined identification information (for example, “◯” (circle)) as the 4th symbol display. And “x” (X) may be displayed alternately).

  The 4th symbol display 51E is comprised from LED (here multi-color LED) etc. The fourth symbol display 51E blinks (may be lit) in a predetermined color (for example, blue) when the second special figure game is being executed. Thus, the 4th symbol display 51E displays the 4th symbol (it is expressed by blinking of the predetermined color of LED here) which shows that the 2nd special figure game is running. It should be noted that at the timing when the variable display result of the second special figure game is derived, it may be lit in a color corresponding to the variable display result (for example, blue for “big hit” and black for “losing”). The 4th symbol display 51E lights up in a predetermined color (for example, blue) when the variable display result of the second special figure game is “big hit” based on the fact that it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. (It may be blinking). Further, the fourth symbol display 51E is composed of a plurality of LEDs, liquid crystal displays, etc., and the fourth symbol display 51E displays a variable display of predetermined identification information (for example, “◯” (circle) as a display of the fourth symbol. And “x” (X) may be displayed alternately).

  The second lamp 52 is provided on the upper side of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The second lamp 52 includes a cover member having a shape such as a character string, and a plurality of LEDs (here, multi-color LEDs). The second lamp 52 is a decoration of the image display device 5 and emits light in accordance with a predetermined effect. Note that the second lamp 52 may be provided on the lower side, the right side, the left side of the image display device 5, or at a plurality of locations. The second lamp 52 may be provided so as to surround the image display device 5.

  The drive mechanism 53 is provided on the back surface of the second lamp 52. The drive mechanism 53 includes a stepping motor, a gear, an arm, and the like, and moves the bar writer 54 downward to advance to the front surface of the image display device 5, rotates the bar writer 54, or moves the bar writer 54 upward. Or retracted from the front of the image display device 5.

  The versatile lighter 54 is provided on the back surface of the second lamp 52. The versatile lighter 54 includes an LED group 545. The LED group 545 includes a plurality of LEDs 545A (here, multi-color LEDs) arranged in a line. The bar writer 54 moves downward from the state hidden behind the second lamp 52 by the drive mechanism 53 and advances to the front of the image display device 5 when performing a predetermined effect, and then the image display device 5 by the drive mechanism 53. Rotate in front of. Then, at the end of a predetermined effect, the versatile writer 54 moves upward by the drive mechanism 53 and retracts from the front surface of the image display device 5, and stops rotating by the drive mechanism 53. For example, by causing the LED 545A to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern (patterns such as emission color, emission color change timing, lighting on / off timing, etc.) during rotation of the versatile lighter 54, characters or characters are generated by an afterimage of light (also referred to as an afterimage). Various displays such as graphics can be performed.

  Here, the hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, first hold indicator 51A, second hold indicator 51B) and fourth symbol display (fourth symbol) in this embodiment. A light emission example of the display 51D and the fourth symbol display 51E) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 4A shows the light emission of the hold indicators (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) controlled by the main board 11 (specifically, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) described later. An example is shown. As shown in FIG. 4 (A), the first hold indicator 25A has a number of lights corresponding to the number of the first special figure hold memory as the light emission mode when the hold of the first special figure game is "pending". The red LED is lit in red. For example, when the number of first special figure hold memory is “1”, one LED is lit red, and when the number of first special figure hold memory is “2”, two LEDs are lit red. When the first special figure reserved memory number is “3”, three LEDs are lit red, and when the first special figure reserved memory number is “4”, four LEDs are lit red. To do. Note that LEDs other than those that are lit red are extinguished as an example. Further, the first hold indicator 25A is in a light-off state in which all LEDs are turned off as a light emission mode when there is no hold of the first special figure game.

  Further, the second hold indicator 25B is lit in blue so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of second special figure hold memory lights up in blue as the light emission mode when the hold of the second special figure game is “pending hold”. It becomes a state. For example, when the number of second special figure hold memory is “1”, one LED is lit blue, and when the number of second special figure hold memory is “2”, two LEDs are lit blue. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “3”, three LEDs are lit blue. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “4”, four LEDs are lit blue. To do. Note that LEDs other than the LED that lights in blue are extinguished as an example. Further, the second hold indicator 25B is in a light-off state in which all LEDs are turned off as a light emitting mode when there is no hold of the second special figure game.

  FIG. 4B shows a light emission example of the hold indicator (first hold indicator 51A, second hold indicator 51B) controlled by the effect control board 12 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) to be described later. . As shown in FIG. 4 (B), the first hold indicator 51A has a number of lights corresponding to the number of the first special figure hold memory as the light emission mode when the hold of the first special figure game is "pending". The red LED is lit in red. For example, when the first special figure reserved memory number is “1”, one LED 51Aa is lit red, and when the first special figure reserved memory number is “2”, the two LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab are red. When the first special figure reserved memory number is “3”, the three LEDs 51Aa to 51Ac are lit red, and when the first special figure reserved memory number is “4”, the four LEDs 51Aa ˜51Ad lights in red. Note that LEDs other than those that are lit red are extinguished as an example. Further, the first hold indicator 51A is in a light-off state in which all LEDs are turned off as a light emission mode when there is no hold of the first special figure game.

  The second hold indicator 51B is lit blue so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold memory lights in blue as the light emission mode when the second special figure game is on hold. It becomes a state. For example, when the second special figure reserved memory number is “1”, one LED 51Ba is lit in blue, and when the second special figure reserved memory number is “2”, the two LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb are blue. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “3”, the three LEDs 51Ba to 51c are lit blue, and when the second special figure reserved memory number is “4”, the four LEDs 51Ba ˜51d lights in blue. Note that LEDs other than the LED that lights in blue are extinguished as an example. In addition, the second hold indicator 51B is in a light-off state in which all LEDs 51Ba to 51d are turned off as a light emission mode when there is no hold of the second special figure game.

  FIG. 4C shows a light emission example of the fourth symbol display (fourth symbol display 51D, fourth symbol display 51E) controlled by the later-described effect control board 12 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120). Indicates. As shown in FIG. 4 (C), the 4th symbol display 51D displays the 4th symbol display 51D as the light emission mode when the first special symbol game is being executed. The configured LED is in a red flashing state in which the LED flashes red. Further, in the 4th symbol display 51D, the LED constituting the 4th symbol display 51D is lit in red when the “1st special symbol big hit” is in the big hit gaming state after the execution of the first special figure game. Red light is on. Note that the 4th symbol display 51D is turned off so that the LED constituting the 4th symbol display 51D is turned off as a light emitting mode when it is other than the above "during the first special figure" and "during the first special figure big hit". It becomes a state.

  In addition, when the 4th symbol display 51E is “running the 2nd special diagram” during the execution of the 2nd special figure game, the LED constituting the 4th symbol display 51E blinks in blue as the light emission mode. Blinks blue. In addition, when the 4th symbol display 51E is in the state of the big hit gaming after the execution of the second special figure game, the LED constituting the 4th symbol display 51E lights up in blue. The blue light is on. The 4th symbol display 51E is turned off so that the LED constituting the 4th symbol display 51E is turned off as a light emission mode when it is other than “during 2nd special figure” and “during 2nd special figure big hit”. It becomes a state.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8L and 8R are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as speakers 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the game progress status of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A first lamp 9 for gaming effect is provided at the periphery of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The first lamp 9 is configured to include a plurality of multi-color LEDs (may be single-color LEDs). Note that a plurality of first lamps 9 are actually provided, but the following description will be made assuming that the first lamp 9 is one. The configuration of each of the plurality of first lamps 9 is arbitrary, and each may be the same or different.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, and the like described above are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 1 includes other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as the effect devices. May be.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time has elapsed. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number “2” is a small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize opening device that opens the grand prize opening during the round is received by receiving a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closing the special prize opening. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. . In this way, the degree of advantage for the player may be different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state.

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed. This small hit gaming state may also have a low advantage over the first specific gaming state.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of one of the special game games, the decorative display variable display is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative design that is not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the first lamp 9 and the like are set as the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach, which has a higher expectation degree of big hits than normal reach, are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, a slide effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative design or the like can be executed as one aspect of the variable display effect. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol resulting in variable display is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is variable display (first time) until all the decorative symbols temporarily stop temporarily in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. (Variable display) times (one time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after the last temporary stop of all decorative symbols (last variable display), and the repeat between the first variable display and the last variable display. The number of variable display times X (X is 0 or 1 or more) and the number of times (X + 1) less than the total number of times (X + 2) are grasped. The number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

In the present embodiment, the notice effect is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. Common productions are included. The notice effect includes a success effect that changes the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image after executing the common effect.
Note that the notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. The suggestion effect may be an effect that is executed in common when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, similarly to the common effect. In other words, when an effect that suggests that a common effect is executed is referred to as a suggestion effect, and an effect that suggests that either a successful effect or a failure effect is executed (a common effect or a common effect) Another production) may be referred to as a suggestion production.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a second hold display of the target, and a variable display corresponding to the hold information of the target is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information and a case where it is executed during digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice notice effect) includes, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL. Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, in the pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, or the second start win memory display area 5HR Action effects such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probability variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after a predetermined reach production is executed in response to the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal symbol of the same type (also referred to as “non-probability variable symbol”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination that displays the final stop. As an example of the normal symbol, among the eight types of decorative symbols having symbol numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative symbols having even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” It is.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, the predetermined decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed.

  By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination May be displayed in a stopped manner. In other words, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol that becomes the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. May be. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which the same type of certain probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and are finally stopped and displayed. An example of a probabilistic design is the four types of decorative symbols with odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” among the eight types of decorative symbols with symbol numbers “1” to “8”. It is.

Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended.
Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability variation control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game whose variable display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probabilistic big hit combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination, it is changed again in a state where the same decorative symbol is aligned, The decorative symbol (probable variation symbol) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) that is a normal jackpot combination may be finally stopped and displayed as a finalized decorative symbol.

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one of the rounds ends in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during the round in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a first lamp control board 14, and a power supply board D1 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, a display control unit 16 described later with the effect control board 12, and the like. Also mounted is a relay board 19 for relaying various control signals transmitted between them. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 also has a function of displaying various hold memories by controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, and the like.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the second control board 12. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by electrical components for rendering such as 1 lamp 9, information display section 51, second lamp 52, drive mechanism 53, and versatile writer 54 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is a display operation in the image display device 5 and the information display unit 51, a sound output operation from the speaker 8 or a part thereof, a lighting / light-off operation in the first lamp 9, the second lamp 52, and the like. Are provided with a function for determining control contents for causing the electrical components for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or a part of the operation, the operation of the drive mechanism 53, and the operation of the bar writer 54.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The first lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is lit on the first lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving / turning off is mounted.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a display driving unit 16, a second lamp driving unit 17, and an accessory driving unit 18. The display driving unit 16, the second lamp driving unit 17, and the accessory driving unit 18 may be mounted on the same substrate or may be mounted on different substrates.

  The display drive unit 16 drives the information display unit 51 based on a command or control data transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 to cause the information display unit 51 to display predetermined information. It is configured as follows. The display drive unit 16 and the information display unit 51 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 19), or may be mounted on separate substrates. In the information display section 51, the first hold display 51A, the second hold display 51B, the character display 51C, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E are driven, respectively, and the first special figure hold memory number is driven. , The number of second special figure hold storage, the character string, the 4th symbol, etc. are displayed.

  The second lamp driving unit 17 includes a lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving of the second lamp 52 based on a command, control data, and the like transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19. The second lamp driving unit 17 and the second lamp 52 may be mounted on the same substrate (a substrate different from the relay substrate 19), or may be mounted on separate substrates.

  The accessory driving unit 18 supplies a driving signal to a stepping motor or the like of the driving mechanism 53 based on a command or control data transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 to operate the driving mechanism 53. It is configured. The accessory drive unit 18 and the drive mechanism 53 may be mounted on the same board (a board different from the relay board 19), or may be mounted on different boards. The drive mechanism 53 includes a rotational position sensor that detects the rotational position of the stepping motor (the rotational position of the versatile writer 54). The rotational position sensor detects, for example, that the stepping motor is in the initial position (the versatile writer 54 is in the initial position), and supplies (feeds back) a detection signal indicating the detection to the effect control board 12.

  The versatile lighter 54 includes a third lamp driving unit 541 in addition to the LED group 545. The third lamp driving unit 541 is a lamp driver circuit that performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the LED group 545 based on commands and control data transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 and the accessory driving part 18. It has. The third lamp driving unit 541 of the versatile lighter 54 includes a slip ring 541A (FIG. 2 and the like). The slip ring 541A connects the bar writer 54 and the outside so that the bar writer 54 can rotate. The electric power and control signal supplied to the bar writer 54 are supplied to the inside of the bar writer (third lamp driving unit 541) via the slip ring 541A. The LED group 545 and the third lamp driving unit 541 may be mounted on the same substrate, or may be mounted on different substrates.

  The power supply board D1 supplies power to the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Power supplied to electrical components (connected to the main board 11) such as the solenoid 81, the first hold indicator 25A, and the first special symbol display device 4A is supplied from the power supply board D1 through the main board 11. Is done. The main board 11 supplies appropriate electric power by applying a voltage required for each electric component to each electric component. Various control boards such as the audio control board 13 and the first lamp control board 14, various lamps such as the first lamp 9, various motors such as the motor of the drive mechanism 53, and various electric parts such as the versa writer 54 (connected to the effect control board 12). The power supplied to the object and the control target of the effect control board 12 is supplied from the power supply board D1 via the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 supplies appropriate electric power by applying a voltage required for each electric component to each electric component. For example, 12V (VDD) is output as a voltage required for driving the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 53, and 5V (VCC) is output as a voltage required for driving the serial / parallel conversion IC, which is necessary for LED light emission driving. 5V (VCL) is output as the voltage. Note that the power supplied to various driving units for driving the members of the versatile writer 54 and the rendering unit 50 may be relayed to the relay board 15. Further, the electric power supplied into the versatile writer 54 may be supplied via the accessory driving unit 18 or may be supplied directly from the relay board 15. Moreover, the electric power supplied to various electrical components may be supplied without going through the main board 11 or the effect control board 12 (may be passed through a relay board or the like as appropriate).

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11. ), A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibrations, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decoration symbol variably displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A0XXH only needs to include a big hit start designation command indicating the big hit gaming state and a big hit start designation command indicating the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the stored storage information, a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying command for designating whether the start winning prize is given to the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening is designated. , And a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved memory number addition designation command (total reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and a determination result of the big hit type as a winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 17A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. It is determined whether or not “small hit” is determined. If “big hit” is determined, the big hit type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the fluctuation The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number MR3 for category determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, it is possible to recognize the variation category based on the value set in the variation category command.

  Note that the effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, etc.). Used. Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and light emission of the first lamp 9 is performed. The effect control command used for controlling the operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, on the main board 11 side, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 7 shows a specific example of the variation category and variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 7, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (lost) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (lack) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (lack). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In FIG. 7, the description of the variation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the loss variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and jackpot variation pattern (except when the jackpot type is abrupt).

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, Data constituting a table as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 8A and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special figure game (special game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state with “big hit”, and whether or not the variable display result is controlled as a small hit gaming state with “small hit” for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred in order to determine based on random number value MR1.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination table 130B A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More decision values are assigned to the “big hit” special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determined values (a value in the range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, since the “special hit” is not achieved in the second special figure game, for example, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B such as a short-time state (low-accuracy base state) or a probability variation state (high-accuracy high-base state) is formed. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” that makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to the extended game. .

  In the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, determination values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display results. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Or you may make it determine a special figure display result with reference to a common special figure display result determination table with a 1st special figure game and a 2nd special figure game.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprising change” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined range of determination values ( When the second special figure game is executed while the variable special figure is the second special figure, the value in the range of “82” to “99” is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of “Accuracy”. With such a setting, the game is not “accurate” in the second special figure game, so that it is possible to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable prize-winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the extended game.

  It should be noted that the determined values in different predetermined ranges may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. . For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” big hit type than when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of “probability” in a gaming state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to common table data in the case where the variation special chart is the first special chart and the second special chart.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Note that one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 10 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 10 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. The holding data (first special figure holding information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL to be one of a plurality of types. Yes. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second start winning prize storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in types of display modes that can be determined in the hold display mode determination table. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. . Instead of a plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a hold effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether or not to execute a hold effect (also referred to as an action effect or a hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold effect is executed, when the hold effect is not executed and when it is executed. Is assigned. In the present embodiment, the holding effect includes a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to the notice mode, and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. This is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the displayed hold display to the notice mode. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change gaze effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute an active display change effect (success effect) that changes a special image including an active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, with or without execution of the active display change effect. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) for changing a special image into a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is an effect to change (main notice effect). In the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect, the successful effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when the special image is changed after the common effect is executed, and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gas effect) that is executed when the special image is not changed later is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not acting on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or the failure effect acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the mode of the special image into one of a plurality of modes and a change of the special image in the second system. And the 2nd system | strain change effect changed to either of several aspects is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect according to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. There are common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as the special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is the special image. The display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) is changed.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores the first system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing of the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect related to the first system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Also, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of first system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all first system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores the second system change referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect, which is one of the active display change effects (timing at which timing of the change is executed). An effect execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect related to the second system change effect is executed differs depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. The ROM 121 stores a plurality of second-system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the second-system change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In the second system change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the second system change effect execution timing is assigned to each execution timing. Yes. Also, instead of a plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may remember.

  Note that the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first system changes in which the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table for the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table for the second system change effect, their determination ratios, and the like are different from each other. An effect execution timing determination table for effects and an execution timing determination table for second system change effects may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. The active display change effect execution timing determination table includes a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect at each execution timing, and the second system. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Also, instead of a plurality of active display change effect execution timing determination tables, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of all active display change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good.

  The ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an active display change effect effect pattern (effect mode) as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the active display change effect effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a random value (not shown) for determining the active display change effect effect pattern for each of the active display change effect effect patterns. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as the number of changes to be executed). In addition, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table. In the hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect execution timing may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the main notice effect other than the active display change effect described above. It may be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table. In the main notice effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern is assigned to each main notice effect pattern. Good.
Instead of a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information on all main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the hold change effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern for each of the hold change effect patterns in the hold change effect pattern determination table. Just do it.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution presence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the change change effect effect is executed. In this case, in the pending change gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold change gaze effect is executed and not executed. (Determined value) may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect effect (timing of how many changes will be executed later). . In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the hold change change effect execution timing determination table. . A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gaze effect may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change gaze effect execution timing determination table. . It should be noted that instead of a plurality of hold change change effect execution timing determination tables, one large change change effect effect execution timing determination table including information on all hold change effect display timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Note that the ROM 121 may store a pending change gasset effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an effect pattern (effect mode) of the pending change gasset effect as one of a plurality of types. In this case, the ROM 121 has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the pending change gaze effect pattern for each of the pending change gaze effect patterns in the pending change gaze effect pattern determination table. It may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 also has an active display mode determination table (also referred to as “digestion display mode determination table”) that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table. In the display mode determination table for active display, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the display mode for active display may be assigned to each display mode for active display. In other words, the ROM 121 has a plurality of active display display modes different from each other in the determined values (for example, the range and the number of determined values) assigned to at least one of the plurality of types of active display display modes. It is sufficient that the determination table is stored. Instead of a plurality of active display display mode determination tables, one large active display display mode determination table including information of all active display display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 provides effects by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, the information display unit 51, the second lamp 52, the drive mechanism 53, the versatile lighter 54, etc.). Data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns used for controlling the operation are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer judgment value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, etc. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes data indicating the light emission operation mode of the first lamp 9 (light emitter), for example. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the first lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. The effect control pattern includes, for example, display contents on the information display unit 51 (first holding display 51A, second holding display 51B, character display 51C, fourth symbol display 51D, and fourth symbol display 51E. Display control data designating display content), lamp control data designating the light emission operation of the second lamp 52, drive control data designating the drive operation of the drive mechanism 53, and the light emission operation of the LED group 545 of the versatile lighter 54. Includes lamp control data. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to cause the first lamp 9 to emit light in a manner specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. In the operation valid period, control is performed to accept the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determine the content of the effect. In addition, the display control of the information display unit 51 is performed in a mode specified by the display control data, the second lamp 52 and the LED group 545 are controlled to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and specified by the drive control data. The drive mechanism 53 is controlled in such a manner. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 11B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  Instructions according to the production control pattern set in this way are sent from the production control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the first lamp control board 14, the display drive unit 16, the second lamp drive unit 17, and the accessory drive unit. 18 or the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 12A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of the multiple types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 12B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number is provided. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A has a storage area so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start prize from the head in the empty area of the first start prize reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 12 (B), in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening prize designation command, symbol designation command, fluctuation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 12B, commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 12B are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 12B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 12C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 12C, the second start opening prize designation command, symbol designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 12C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 12 (C) are deleted one by one every time variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 12C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 12D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to each data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents of the prefetching notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 12B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 12E is stored in a predetermined area of effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the prefetch notice effects relating to the hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Is done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 12C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 displays on the image display device 5 based on the control of the effect control CPU 120 (for example, based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 120). A video signal of the effect image to be output is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), or the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used. For example, the effect control CPU 120 transmits a display control command for designating an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to the display control unit 123 according to display control data included in the effect control pattern. The display control unit 123 uses the data stored in the CGROM or the like (storage unit) according to the display control command from the effect control CPU 120 to display a video signal specified by the display control command. Is output. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control (control based on the effect control pattern) of the effect control CPU 120 is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. Become.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, the video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, the control signal (sound effect signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and the first lamp control board 14 are transmitted. Control signals transmitted to the display drive unit 16, the second lamp drive unit 17, and the accessory drive unit 18 (or the third lamp drive unit 541) via the relay board 19 are output. Is done. The control signal is supplied as a serial signal.

  The image display device 5 includes a display panel composed of a liquid crystal panel and the like, a driver circuit that drives the display panel, and the like. The video signal supplied to the image display device 5 from the display control unit 123 via the I / O 125 based on the control of the effect control CPU 120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal, and displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 14 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in steps S208 and S211 in FIG. 15 as the start winning process. FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S220 of FIG. 16 as the winning random number determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number (the first special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit storing number). (4)) is determined (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After executing the process of step S209, the second start port switch 22B is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number (the second special figure game holding number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). (4)) is determined (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 16) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 16) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211), the CPU 103 updates the special figure holding storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (step S215 in FIG. 16). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B. At this time, when the numerical data is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the CPU 103 can control the first reservation indicator 25A to specify the first special figure reservation storage number added by one. The first hold display is performed on the first hold display 25A (for example, the number of red LEDs lit is increased by one). Further, when the numerical data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to specify the second special figure hold memory number added by one. The hold display is performed on the second hold indicator 25B (for example, the number of blue lights of the LED is increased by one). Note that the processing of the first hold display and the second hold display may be performed in step S215, for example.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening prize designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220), the CPU 103, for example, confirms the state of the time reduction flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, etc. Is identified (step S401 in FIG. 17A). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S401, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current Corresponding to the gaming state, the special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S402). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 in FIG. 16 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes processing similar to that in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result decision table data selected by the processing in step S402. Thus, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Are set for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and the respective determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 displays a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404), a reserved memory number (for example, a first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variable category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected based on the stored value such as the first reserved memory number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variation category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the variable category determination table. The configuration example of the variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of one type of variation category determination table “C-TBL1” among the above four types. FIG. 19B shows a configuration example of another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL2”. FIG. 19C shows a configuration example of still another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. FIG. 19D shows a configuration example of still another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL4”. For simplification of explanation, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19A is set may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 19B to 19D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 18 is a selection for selecting any of the variation category determination tables from the four types of variation category determination tables (“C-TBL1” to “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 19 (A) to 19 (D). It is an example.

  In the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 19A, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories PA1 to PA5. Note that the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. Is the same.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 19A, among 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3, 0 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 19A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determination values of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 19D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 19D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of the variation category determination tables in FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the special figure display result is “lost”, when the number of reserved memories is large, compared to when the number of reserved memories is small, The determination ratio of the shortened / non-reach (losing) variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  Further, in the setting examples of the variation category determination tables of FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the special figure display result is “lost”, the super reach (lost) ) Variation category (variation category “PA4” or variation category “PA5”) is fixed. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  19A to 19C, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-” are set. In any of “TBL3”, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance that at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 17B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (decision result) by the process of step S412 (step S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decoration symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 7, a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, the big win type corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change” is set to “29 seconds” as the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened, and the upper prize is the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is open has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the first lamp 9 is executed. Processing that waits until it elapses, processing that performs various settings for starting probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hitting end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the first lamp 9. Processing to wait until is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S <b> 231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores the hold corresponding to the hold number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding memory number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the figure game is put on hold, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to a mode in which the second special figure game is executed in preference to the first special figure game (so-called special figure two priority digestion), and the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) ), The special game (first special game, second special game) is executed in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings (first start winning, second start winning) occur. (It may be a so-called winning order digestion). In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data. Alternatively, the second special figure game and the first special figure game may be executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation).

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. Similar to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. 17A, special figure display result determination table data is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of step S239, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”. In this case, the second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the usage table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the jackpot types is a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the number of reserved games stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in step S235 (step S235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the variation pattern for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random value MR5 is extracted.

  Note that, as described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of reserved memories, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning a prize, the number of reserved memories is different between when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (step S111) is executed. Even if they are greatly different, the variation pattern setting process determines the same variation category as the winning random number determination process. For example, in the specific examples of the variable category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is, for example, “99”, the winning is won regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined in both the random time value determination process and the fluctuation pattern setting process. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined. In the process of step S111, it is preferable to determine the variation category using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data. However, the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value MR3. The variation category may be determined by using the extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category that has been extracted.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random number MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 18, a variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. The variation category is determined based on the table and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern determination table to be set as a use table from among a plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, based on the variation category that is the determination result. Subsequently, based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the CPU 103 selects any variation pattern from among a plurality of types of variation patterns. To decide.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 21A is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 21B is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 21C is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 21D to 21H.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the special figure display result determined in steps S403, S404, S409, etc. are made (steps S405, S407, S410), and determined in step S412. Transmission setting for transmitting a variation category command according to the variation category (step S413) is performed, and transmission setting for transmitting a pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, the game ball passes (enters) through the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening) by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. When the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification Four commands called commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as a set in one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. When the variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 13 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in bulk.
Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  In other words, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” or “small hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110) at the timing when the variable symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started. It is determined whether or not to control to the gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and the variable pattern setting process (step S111) determines the specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols, respectively. The content determined by the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), a “big hit” or “ It is determined whether or not it is controlled as a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state as “small hits”, or a rough variable display mode (variation category) of decorative symbols is determined, and determined by each production control command The contents thus transmitted are transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the CPU 103, for example, in the processing of steps S233 and S237 in the special symbol normal processing of step S110 or the variation pattern setting processing of step S111, A process of updating the first hold display and the second hold display on the hold indicator 25B is executed. For example, when starting the first special figure game, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display a display capable of specifying the first special figure hold memory number obtained by subtracting one from the first hold indicator 25A. (E.g., reduce the number of red LED lights by 1). In addition, when starting the second special figure game, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one second hold indicator 25B. (E.g., reduce the number of LEDs that are lit blue by one).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, various operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the first lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, effect random number update processing is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 22 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first receives the command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning prize (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; Yes), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the gaming state designation command is analyzed to identify the current gaming state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to determine whether the time is short.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. Further, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 22 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S150 in FIG. 24 as the winning effect determination process.

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). It is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not a first start port winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening prize designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the stored contents in the second start prize received command buffer 194B are checked (step S153), and a new one is received. It is determined whether or not a second start opening winning designation command is received as a received command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the winning effect determining process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), a red lighting addition process for the first hold indicator 51A is performed (step S152A). By executing the process of step S152A, one LED that is lit red is increased among the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A. After the process of step S152A, if it is specified that the time is not short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 (step S155: NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (step S160). ). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL.
In addition, in the case where a hold change effect or a hold change gaze effect for a hold display when additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is executed, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a holding | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines whether it is determined to perform a holding | maintenance effect is determined.

First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described.
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 26A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 26 (B) shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 26C shows setting of a display mode determination ratio of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 26D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 26E shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. 26 is an example of setting the aspect ratio (H-TBL5), and Fig. 26 (F) shows a hold selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types. 26 is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the display mode determination ratio of the hold display based on the display mode determination table, and Fig. 26 (G) is a variation category "PB5 (super It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when

  According to FIG. 26, for example, in the case of reach, red and yellow are more easily determined than in the case of non-reach, and blue and white (initial color) are less likely to be determined. In addition, in the case of reaching, it is easier to determine red and yellow, and it is more difficult to determine blue and white than in the case of reaching hot (eg, normal reach) when it is hot (eg, super reach). ing. Alternatively, according to FIGS. 18, 19, and 26, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red and yellow are more easily determined than when the special figure display result is “losing”. The white color is difficult to determine. In other words, the red and yellow display modes have a higher expectation level for executing a hot effect and a big hit rate than the blue and white display modes. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot performance is executed and the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit are higher.

  That is, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 uses a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 26 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display to be displayed (display mode when added) is determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S161). . Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize received command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when determining to execute the hold change effect, the content of the hold effect determination process (hold change) (Execution timing in the case of executing the effect, execution timing in the case of executing the hold change gaze effect, execution timing in the case of executing the hold change) corresponding to the buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to In association with the buffer number of 1 prefetch notice buffer 194C, determination contents of hold effect determination processing (information (eg, flag) indicating execution of hold change effect, information indicating execution of hold change effect) (eg, information indicating execution of hold change effect) Flag), information indicating execution of the hold change (for example, flag)), and a hold display as a target hold display. Information specifying the changed hold display (that is, the hold display by the first start winning) (for example, the first pre-reading notice corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) Buffer number of the buffer 194C) may be stored.

  In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning of the third special figure hold memory number 3, the additional display mode “white”, the hold effect “executed (hold change effect executed) When the execution timing is determined as “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). ”) Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number“ 3 ”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, and the first corresponding to the execution timing“ next variation ”is stored. The buffer number (buffer number) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning prize It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determining process, the buffer in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determining process. Only information specifying the target hold display (hold display by the first start winning prize) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (hold change effect is executed) (It is not necessary to store information indicating that this is to be done.)

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determining process (step S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A). First addition of a new hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first A hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a use pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold presentation The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), a blue lighting addition process for the second hold indicator 51B is performed (step S154A). By performing the process of step S154A, one LED that is lit blue is increased among the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B. After the process of step S154A, when it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 (step S156: YES), the second hold effect determination process is executed (step S163). ). The second hold effect determination process includes a process for determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.
In addition, in the case of executing a hold change effect or a hold change gaze effect for a hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, in the step, whether the hold change effect or the hold change gaze effect is executed. What is necessary is just to perform the process which determines the execution timing of a holding | maintenance effect, etc., when the process which determines whether it is determined to perform a holding | maintenance effect is determined.

  In addition, each process of step S163, step S164, and step S165 related to the second start opening prize is the same as the process related to each process of step S160, step S161, and step S162 related to the first start opening prize, Since “first” in each step can be read as “second” and the code can be read corresponding to the reading, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL as the initial color (white), and receives the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content, the first hold display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL (step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is not short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. (Step S156: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning memory display area 5HR as the normal display (white ball), and at the time of the second start winning prize In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content in the received command buffer 194B, the second hold display in the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR. (Step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is terminated.

  After performing the winning effect determining process in step S150 shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, a fourth symbol control process for performing control to display the fourth symbol is performed (step S180). FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S180 of FIG. 24 as the fourth symbol control process.

  In the fourth symbol control process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a first variation start command has been received (step S181). If it is determined in step S181 that the first variation start command has been received (step S181; Yes), a red blinking control process is performed to blink and display the fourth symbol for the first special figure in red (step S182). ). In step S182, for example, the 4th symbol is displayed via the display drive unit 16 so that the 4th symbol for the first special figure blinks in red for a display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Processing for controlling the display 51D is performed.

  If it is determined in step S181 that the first change start command has not been received (step S181; No), it is determined whether a second change start command has been received (step S183). If it is determined in step S183 that the second variation start command has been received (step S183; Yes), a blue blinking control process for blinking and displaying the fourth symbol for the second special figure in blue (step S184) is performed. ). In step S184, for example, the fourth symbol for the second special figure blinks in blue for the display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Processing for controlling the display 51E is performed.

  When it is determined in step S183 that the second variation start command has not been received (step S183; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S182 and S184, the jackpot start designation command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (step S185). If it is determined in step S185 that the jackpot start designation command has been received (step S185; Yes), whether or not the variable display game executed immediately before receiving the jackpot start designation command is the first special figure game. Is determined (step S186). For example, as a jackpot start designation command, a jackpot start designation command indicating the start of a jackpot gaming state after the first special figure game and a jackpot start indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started after the second special figure game It only needs to include the specified command. In this case, in step S186, when the jackpot start designation command indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state after the first special figure game is received, the variable display executed immediately before receiving the jackpot start designation command. What is necessary is just to determine with a game being a 1st special figure game.

  When it is determined in step S186 that the variable display game executed immediately before receiving the jackpot start designation command is the first special figure game (step S186; Yes), the fourth symbol for the first special figure is red. Then, a red lighting control process for lighting display is performed (step S187). In step S187, a process for controlling the fourth symbol display 51D via the display driving unit 16 is performed so that the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is lit in red.

  If it is determined in step S186 that the variable display game executed immediately before receiving the jackpot start designation command is not the first special figure game (second special figure game) (step S186; No), A blue lighting control process is performed to turn on and display the fourth symbol for 2 special figures in blue (step S188). In step S188, the process for controlling the 4th symbol display 51E is performed via the display drive part 16 so that the 4th symbol for 2nd special figures may be lighted and displayed in blue.

  If it is determined in step S185 that a jackpot start designation command has not been received (step S185; No), or after any of the processes in steps S187 and S188 has been executed, has a jackpot end designation command been received? It is determined whether or not (step S189). If it is determined in step S189 that a jackpot end designation command has been received (step S189; Yes), a turn-off control process for turning off the fourth symbol is performed (step S190). In step S190, for example, when the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is lit in red, that is, when the LED of the fourth symbol indicator 51D is lit in red, the symbol for the first special symbol is displayed. Processing for controlling the fourth symbol display 51D is performed via the display driving unit 16 so that the fourth symbol is turned off. Further, when the 4th symbol for the second special symbol is lit in blue, that is, when the LED of the fourth symbol indicator 51E is lit in blue, the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is displayed. Processing for controlling the fourth symbol display 51E is performed via the display driving unit 16 so as to be turned off.

  In step S190, the first special figure 4 symbol is displayed in red or the second special figure 4 symbol is displayed in blue. You may control to turn off both the 4th symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special figure. In this case, the 4th symbol which is originally turned off is kept off.

  If it is determined in step S189 that the jackpot end designation command has not been received (step S189; No), after executing the process of step S190, the fourth symbol control process is terminated. When it is determined that the jackpot end designation command has not been received (step S189; No), for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative design is read from the effect control pattern, or the main board In response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from 11, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol or the decorative symbol for the second special symbol is turned off.

  After the fourth symbol control process of step S180 shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, the following steps S170 to S170 are performed. One of the processes of 177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effects of various effects (for example, active display as a main notice effect) It includes processing for determining a change effect and an effect mode of the active display change effect. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data and displays it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various types of effect control are executed, such as control for outputting effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the first lamp 9 by outputting an electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14.

  After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hit effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect processing, various effect controls in the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electrical decoration signals, and the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and reads various control data based on the set contents, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect process, various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 24 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result becomes “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated fluctuation pattern is used. Is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, “PA2-3” in FIG. 7) corresponding to the case where the decorative display variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols.

  Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. In the process of step S524, a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the changing symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When it is determined to be “accuracy” or “small hit” (step S526; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or “small hit”, such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. By referring to the above, the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that constitute any of the opening chances may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S526 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S526; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the display is stopped and aligned in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. A decorative design having the same design number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the plural types of normal symbols is selected and determined as the definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols, and a definite ornament symbol pattern that constitutes a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination is selected. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of a non-probability variable jackpot combination, a notification that it will be controlled to a promiscuous state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the jackpot gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After performing any one of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, a pending digest process is performed (step S531). Specifically, an active display corresponding to the variation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, a special image including the active display corresponding to the variation is displayed). For example, when the change of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special symbol game (when the variable display of the decorative symbol is linked to the first special symbol game), the first start winning memory display area An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set production control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. An active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of area 5HL is displayed in active display area AHA. Note that the active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same manner as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the process of step S531, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be digested in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 displays the other hold display as the first. When there is a hold display in addition to the active display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the other hold display is shifted in the second start prize storage display area 5HR.

  After executing the process of step S531, an effect execution setting process is executed (step S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, a process for determining the type of active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active at the time of execution. Includes the process of determining the display mode of the display change effect, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when it is executed, and the process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on these determination results It is. Details will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S532, the execution execution setting during other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, the execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” is performed to immediately notify (definitely notify) that the variable display result is “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. May be. Examples of jackpot notification sounds are alarm sounds, chime sounds, siren sounds, and the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a specific first lamp 9 or the like. Further, in the process of step S533, it may be set so that a predetermined aspect of the effect is performed for liveliness, for example, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, you may set so that the effect of the aspect in which the predetermined | prescribed 1st lamp | ramp 9 light-emits is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S534). . Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535).

  For example, an image display is performed by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process in step S532 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The sound in the speaker 8 is transmitted by setting the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 5 or transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. In order to start light emission in the first lamp 9 by transmitting the setting signal for starting output or the illumination signal specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the first lamp control board 14. Set up. In addition, the display content specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern is transmitted to the display drive unit 16, for example, and settings for starting various displays in the information display unit 51 are included in the effect control pattern. Settings for starting light emission in the second lamp 52 by transmitting the light emission operation designated by the lamp control data to the second lamp driving unit 17 and the drive operation designated by the drive control data included in the effect control pattern Is transmitted to the accessory driving unit 18 through the accessory driving unit 18 for setting to start driving in the driving mechanism 53 and the light emission operation specified by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern. Light emission in the LED group 545 is started by transmitting to the third lamp driving unit 541 of the versatile lighter 54. Carry out the order setting.

  After executing the processing of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning prize reception command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, when the variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most of the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening prize designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order, and when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the command is stored in the second starting winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands being The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of step S536, when the decoration pattern starts to change in conjunction with the first special figure game, a red lighting reduction process of the first hold indicator 51A is performed. By executing the red lighting reduction process of the first hold indicator 51A, one of the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A that is lit red is reduced. In addition, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, a blue lighting reduction process of the second hold indicator 51B is performed. By performing the blue lighting reduction process of the second hold indicator 51B, one LED that is lit blue among the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B is reduced. Note that the red lighting reduction process of the first hold indicator 51A and the blue lighting reduction process of the second hold indicator 51B may be executed, for example, in the hold digest process of step S531.

  Further, in the process of step S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching advance notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S537), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active The process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. In the setting example, whether or not the active display change effect is to be executed and the type of active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed) are determined. It is a setting example. In the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with a random number MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect are “executed” and “not executed”. Are assigned at a decision rate as shown in FIG. In the “execution present” in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determination is “first system change effect” and “ Each of the “second system change effect” and the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is assigned at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame, The target which acts by the 2nd system change production differs.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. The variation pattern PA1-X represents the variation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 7, and the variation pattern PA2-X is one of the variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, and PA2-3 shown in FIG. -1 to PA2-3), and the fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 (PA3-1 to PA3-2) shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA4-X. Represents one of the variation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, and PA4-4 shown in FIG. 7 (PA4-1 to PA4-4). The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB3-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 29, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-X, PA2-X, “no execution” is 100. %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the fluctuation is non-reach (losing), it indicates that the active display change effect is not executed.

  Further, when the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X Compared to a certain case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is lower. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change is “big hit” is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the loss occurs in the change. In other words, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio of determining “first system change effect and second system change effect” when “execution is performed” is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 57% (40 ÷ 70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined when “execution present” is determined is approximately 33% (10 ÷ 30). It is. Or more specifically, whether the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is any of the variation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or any of the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) in which the “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined by the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specification command is the change pattern PA3-X to PA5-. It is larger than the difference in the ratio at which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of X is the variation pattern PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when the variation pattern is PB3-X, the ratio at which “first system change effect and second system change effect” are determined, and when the variation pattern is PA3-X, “first system change effect and second system change effect”. While the difference from the ratio at which the “production” is determined is 30% (40% −10%), the ratio and the fluctuation pattern at which the “first system change effect” is determined when the variation pattern PB3-X is used. The difference from the ratio at which the “first system change effect” is determined for PA3-X is 5% (15% -10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of being a “big hit” is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  When the variation pattern of the variation designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the variation pattern is PA3-X or PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which “no execution” is determined is lower. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when super reach is reached in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when normal reach is set in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation for super reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation for super reach is higher than when the first system change effect is not performed.

  In other words, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute an active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when executing an active display change effect, Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined as “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  Next, a process for determining an effect mode of an active display change effect to be executed in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing an active display change effect will be described.

  FIG. 30A is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 30B is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 30C shows the determination ratio of the production style of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. In addition, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect types of 12 kinds of first system change effects and second system change effects according to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. To do.

The first system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display for active display, for example, an action effect that changes the display shape of the active display.
In FIG. 30A, if the active display change effect pattern “BP1” is “sphere” as the default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect) that is not changed. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP2” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the “triangle” active display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “pentagon”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the figure, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that becomes “lost”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect of a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change is changed from the default display shape “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the drawing, the determination ratio is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that becomes “lost”.

  The second system change effect is an action effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an action effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame.

  In FIG. 30B, the active display change effect pattern “CP1” has an active display frame as a default when the thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is “normal”. This is an effect pattern of a failure effect (active display change effect effect) in which the thickness of the line is not changed to “normal”. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “middle thickness”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. According to the example shown in the figure, when the variation pattern becomes “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that becomes “lost”. It is high. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The first system change effect and the second system change effect are the active display that surrounds the active display by the action effect that changes the display mode of the active display by the first system change effect and the second system change effect that is described above. It is an action effect that performs both an effect effect that changes the display mode of the frame.

  In FIG. 30C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere”, and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display If the display is “normal”, the display of the active display remains “sphere” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal” and the effect of failure (active display change effect) It is a pattern. According to the example shown in the figure, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the active display frame shape from “normal” to “middle thickness” while keeping the active display shape “sphere” and enclosing the active display. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is larger than the variation pattern that is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB4-1). It is high. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is for heat (for example, super reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. This is the production pattern. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “lost”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern in an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. “AP6” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame remains “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thickness”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the change pattern of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command ( Variable display pattern), the active display change effect pattern is determined as an effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

  Next, a process for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect in the fluctuation will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a determination ratio based on an effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect. The ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) first system change effect execution timings according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7 as the first system change effect execution execution timings. And The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach in the change is established, and the timing 4 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established in the change (during reach). The pseudo continuous fluctuation time is, for example, when the variable display during the fluctuation is temporarily stopped.

  Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ small ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “small”, and “success expectation degree“ medium ”. The variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 are classified as “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the degree of success expectation “small”. Represents. Further, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as “success expectation degree“ large ”” indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is “large” higher than the success expectation degree “medium”. In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are represented and classified as “success expectation degree“ maximum ””, the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is the above-described success expectation degree “high”. Represents a higher “maximum”.

  Specifically, in FIG. 30, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. The ratio determined for the change display pattern CP1 and the active display change display pattern AP1, which is the failure display of the first system change display and the second system change display, is compared with the ratio determined for the other active display change display patterns. The level of success is low, and the degree of success expectation at which a successful performance can be executed is low, and as described above, the success expectation is classified as “small”.

  Further, in FIG. 30, the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. In PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for the active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which are the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The success expectation at which the success effect can be executed is higher than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed is high due to the variation pattern as shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2 that is not a pseudo continuous variation. PA5-1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 represent that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2.

  According to FIG. 31, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. In addition, in the case of the variation pattern that becomes “big hit”, the determination ratio determined at a later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than the variation pattern that becomes “lost”. . In addition, after reaching reach (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of a successful performance is higher than before reaching (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the successful effect is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation (for example, the timing 1). Yes. With such a setting, the ratio of executing the successful effect differs depending on which timing of the common effect of the active display change effect is executed among the timings 1 to 4 during execution of the variable display.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random number MR9 for determining the execution timing of the active display change effect and the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command. The execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed is determined according to the pattern (variable display pattern).

  It should be noted that at the timing 2, depending on the number of temporary stops of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation, for example, immediately after the start of the revariable display, such as at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Moreover, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after reach establishment, for example, the execution timing is set so that the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is set after the timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

  Moreover, the example of setting the determination ratio of the production mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 30 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. May be stored in the ROM 121 as one table. The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect.

  An example of setting the determination ratio (not shown) by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect is an example of setting the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of execution of the first system change effect as shown in FIG. Even if it is the same, it may be a setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect different from the setting example of the determination ratio by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect Good.

  In FIG. 29, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect”, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is shown in FIG. Using the example of setting the determination ratio based on the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined so as to be executed at the same timing. You may determine in a lump so that each execution timing with 2 system | strain change effect may become a different execution timing. 29, when it is determined to execute the “first system change effect and the second system change effect”, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately using an example of setting the determination ratio based on the effect execution timing determination table.

  Next, processing for setting (or resetting) an effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change An effect production pattern and an execution timing of an active display change effect are set as an effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command as an effect control pattern, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. If a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command are prepared, any one is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (step S532) ends.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result using the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (steps S403 and S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result that is the determination result, the number of reserved memories updated in step S215, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 (step S412). . The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (step S413), and executes command control processing (step S17). Thereby, a variation category command for specifying the variation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to update the first hold display when the first start condition is satisfied, and updates the second hold condition when the second start condition is satisfied. The hold indicator 25B is controlled to update the second hold display (step S218).

  On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the variation category extracted in step S217 in the variation pattern setting process (step S111). Without using the random value MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern based on numerical data indicating the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category and numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the variation pattern sets transmission of a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (step S17). Thereby, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the main board 11 side, when the first start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to update the first hold display, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied. The hold display device 25B is controlled to update the second hold display (the processes of steps S233 and S237, etc.).

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120, in the hold effect determination process (step S160), the first start prize storage display area The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the 5HL or the second start winning memory display area 5HR is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination contents of the hold effect determination process (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C or the second prefetch notice buffer. While storing (step S161), a hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second starting winning storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode at the time of addition) (step S162). On the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first hold indicator 51A to update the first hold display, and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, the second hold display 51B is controlled to update the second hold display (steps S152A and S154A).

  On the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 displays an active display corresponding to the variable display to be started in the active display area AHA (step S1). S531). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the active display change effect is executed, the type of the active display change effect when it is executed, the effect mode of the active display change effect, the execution timing of the active display change effect, and the like. After setting the effect control pattern based on the determination result, various effects such as an active display change effect are executed according to the set effect control pattern. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first hold indicator 51A to update the first hold display, and the second start condition is satisfied. If so, the second hold display 51B is controlled to update the second hold display (step S536).

  Next, a state when various effects are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 40B.

  FIG. 32 is a front view of the rendering unit when the versatile writer is rotating. As shown in FIG. 32, the versa writer 54 is rotated in front of the image display device 5 by the drive mechanism 53 in response to execution of a predetermined effect. Further, the LED 545A of the versatile lighter 54 emits light, and a light emission afterimage of the LED 545A is generated. The rotation and light emission of the versatile lighter 54 are controlled by the effect control CPU 120. In this state, a part or all of the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the second start prize storage display area 5HR, and the active display area AHA are hidden by the light emission afterimage of the LED 545A. As described above, the first hold display in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL, the second hold display in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, and the like are visually recognized by executing the effect of rotating the versatile writer 54 in front of the image display device 5. Impossible or difficult to see. Therefore, the player cannot recognize the presence / absence of the reserved memory by the first hold display in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL or the second hold display in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. However, even in such a state, the first hold display on the first hold display 51A of the information display unit 51 and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B are continuously performed. Therefore, the player can recognize the presence / absence of the on-hold storage from these on-hold displays.

  Further, for example, due to a failure of the first hold indicator 25A or the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11, the first hold indicator on the first hold indicator 25A or the second hold indicator on the second hold indicator 25B. Even in a state where the display cannot be performed, the first hold display on the first hold display 51A of the information display unit 51 and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B are performed. With the hold display, the presence or absence of the hold storage can be surely grasped.

  33A and 33B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 33A (A) and (e) in FIG. 33B (A) are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. The same applies to (a) to (d) in FIG. 33A (B) and (e) in FIG. 33B (B). 33A and 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 represents that the decorative design is changing. 33A (A) and 33B (A) show the successful effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 30 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. FIGS. 33A (B) and 33B (B) show failure effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  The scene of (a) in FIG. 33A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started). Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Note that the active display AH is executed and the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed. The active display area AHA is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5, for example. In the active display area AHA, at least an active display AH and an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH are displayed. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA such as the inside or outside of the active display AH itself or the active display frame AHW.

  Immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in FIG. 33A (A), the buffer number “1” in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is held (active display AH). The display mode of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) (additional display mode “white”) is stored as the production content corresponding to In buffer number “2” of buffer 194C, the display mode (additional display mode “white”) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. The buffer number “3” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is determined at the time of starting winning the hold display H2 as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2. The display mode of the hold display H2 (additional display mode “white”) is stored, and the buffer number “4” of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C is activated as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode of the hold display H3 determined at the time of winning a prize (additional display mode “white”) is stored. The same applies to FIGS. 34A to 40B.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 33A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. This is a scene where variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the change at (b) in FIG. 33A (A) is a change in which the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 33A (A) (c) shows a case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the start of variable display in the scene of FIG. 33A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). It is an example. In (c) of FIG. 33A (A), an arrow Y2 on which characters of “hot heat” are drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 33A (B) (a) to 33A (B) (c) are similar to FIG. 33A (A) (a) to FIG. 33A (A) (c). That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 33A (A) to (c) of FIG. 33A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 33A (B) to (c) of FIG. 33A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  In the scene (d) of FIG. 33A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 33A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW. The scene (e) in FIG. 33B (A) is a scene in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In addition, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 33B (A), the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 33A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene shown in (e) of FIG. 33B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW, so that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW remains the “normal” display mode. It is. In addition, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 33B (B), the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  34A and 34B are diagrams illustrating display operation examples in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 34A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 34B (A) are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 34A (B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 34B (B). 34A and 34B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 34A (A) and 34B (A) show a successful effect of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 30 (A) as an effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (shape “star”)) is set. 34A (B) and 34B (B) show failure effects of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. Nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

  The scene of (a) of FIG. 34A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started). Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Note that the active display AH is executed and the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) in FIG. 34A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. This is a scene where variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the change at (b) in FIG. 34A (A) is a change in which the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. The scene of (b) of FIG. 34A (A) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). In FIG. 34A (A) (b), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. However, the triangle Z2 disappears and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. The scene of (d) of FIG. 34A (A) moves from the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (A) to the lower part of the image display device 5 and the graphic group Y1 as the first system change effect moves to the lower part of the image display apparatus 5. Of the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the stars Z1 continue to move. 34A (B) (a) to (d) in FIG. 34A (B) are the same as (a) in FIG. 34A (A) to (d) in FIG. 34A (A). That is, the first system change from (b) of FIG. 34A (A) to (d) of FIG. 34A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 34A (B) to (d) of FIG. 34A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  The scene of (e) in FIG. 34B (A) is a scene in which the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. is there. The scene (f) in FIG. 34B (A) is a scene displayed in a display mode in which the display shape of the active display AH is changed to “star” after the star Z1 collides. In addition, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 34B (A), the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 34B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but before it collides with the active display AH. It is a scene that has disappeared. The scene (f) in FIG. 34B (B) is a scene that is displayed in a display mode in which the display shape of the active display AH remains “sphere” because the star Z1 disappears without colliding. In the scene of (f) in FIG. 34B (B), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is the reach state.

  35A and 35B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 35A (A) and (e) to (g) in FIG. 35B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 35A (B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 35B (B). In FIGS. 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIG. 35A (A) and FIG. 35B (A) show the success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 30C as the effect modes of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (change present (thickness “extremely thick”), change present (shape “star”)) is set. FIG. 35A (B) and FIG. 35B (B) show failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  The scene of (a) in FIG. 35A shows an active display AH in the active display area AHA (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started). Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Note that the active display AH is executed and the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 35A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. This is a scene where variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the change at (b) in FIG. 35A (A) is a change in which the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 35A (A) (c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the start of variable display in the scene of FIG. 35A (A) (b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). It is an example when is executed. In (c) of FIG. 35A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is produced. As an effect, an arrow Y <b> 2 in which the characters “Intense heat” is drawn is displayed at the upper left of the image display device 5. (A) in FIG. 35A (B) to (c) in FIG. 35A (B) are the same as (a) in FIG. 35A (A) to (c) in FIG. 35A (A). That is, the first system change from (b) in FIG. 35A (A) to (c) in FIG. 35A (A) and from (b) in FIG. 35A (B) to (c) in FIG. 35A (B). This is a common effect that is executed in common between the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

  In the scene (d) of FIG. 35A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 35A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. However, the triangle Z2 disappears, the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move, and the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 35A (A) (c) is the image display device 5. It is the scene which is moving toward the lower part of and collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 35B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of “extremely thick”. The figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves from the scene of 35A (A) (d) toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, This is a scene in which the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

  The scene (f) in FIG. 35B (A) is a scene in which the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. is there. The scene (g) in FIG. 35B (A) is a scene displayed in a display mode in which the display shape of the active display AH is changed to “star” after the star Z1 collides. In addition, in the scene of (g) of FIG. 35B (A), the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 34A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 34A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 35A (B), the graphic group Y1 that is the first system change effect moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 35A (B). Among the stars Z1 and pentagons Z3 constituting the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. In the scene (f) in FIG. 35B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. It is a scene. The scene of (g) in FIG. 35B (B) is a scene where the display shape of the active display AH is displayed in the display mode as “sphere” because the star Z1 disappears without colliding. In addition, in the scene of (g) of FIG. 35B (B), the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  36A and 36B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) in FIG. 36A (A) and (e) to (f) in FIG. 36B (A) are obtained by arranging scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) in FIG. 36B and (e) to (f) in FIG. 36B (B). In FIGS. 36A and 36B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIGS. 36A (A) and 36B (A) show the successful effects of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 30 (B) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. (Changed (thickness “extremely thick”)) is set. FIGS. 36A (B) and 36B (B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  36A (A) shows an active display area AHA in which an active display AH (the hold display corresponding to the variable display when the variable display is started is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA). Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Note that the active display AH is executed and the confirmed decorative symbols (“3”, “9”, “4”) are stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of (b) of FIG. 36A (A), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1. This is a scene where variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the change at (b) in FIG. 36A (A) is a change in which the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 36A (A) (c) is a scene where the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A (A) (b). The scene of (d) of FIG. 36A (A) is an example when the 2nd system | strain change effect is performed after reach establishment (for example, the timing 3 of FIG. 30). In (d) of FIG. 36A (A), an arrow Y2 on which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 36A (B) (a) to 36 (A) (d) are the same as (a) to (A) of FIG. 36A (A). That is, the second system change from (b) of FIG. 36A (A) to (d) of FIG. 36A (A) and from (b) of FIG. 36A (B) to (d) of FIG. 36A (B). It is a common performance that is executed in common by a successful performance and a failed performance.

  In the scene (e) of FIG. 36A (A), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 36A (A) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. This is a scene of collision with the active display frame AHW. The scene of (f) in FIG. 36B (A) is such that the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (e) of FIG. 36A (A). It is the scene which is changing as a display mode.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 36A (B) moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. Thus, the scene moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 36B (B), the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW, and the line thickness of the active display frame AHW remains the same as the “normal” display mode. It is.

  Note that the first system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect may also be executed after the reach is established, as described above.

  37A and 37B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 37A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 37B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 37A and 37B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. FIG. 37A and FIG. 37B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 37A, the active display AH (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) is displayed in the active display area AHA. This is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  In the scene of FIG. 37A (c), after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 37A, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display state in which the variable display state of the decorative symbol is different from the reach state. It is. In the scene (d) of FIG. 37A, the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol temporarily stops in the scene (e) of FIG. 37A. Then, in the scene shown in FIG. 37A (f), all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (revariably displayed).

  In (g) of FIG. 37B, an arrow Y2 in which the characters “Intense heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. From (a) of FIG. 37A to (g) of FIG. 37B is a common effect executed in common by the successful effect and the failed effect in the second system change effect. In the scene of (h) of FIG. 37B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (g) of FIG. 37B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW is displayed. It is a scene of a collision. The scene of (i) of FIG. 37B is a scene where the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In addition, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 37B, the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  38A and 38B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 38A and (g) to (j) in FIG. 38B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 38A and 38B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 38A and 38B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B in that they are pseudo-continuous fluctuations. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 38A, the active display AH (the active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) is displayed in the active display area AHA. This is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  The scene of (c) of FIG. 38A is a scene in which the variable display state of the decorative design is in the reach state after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 38A. In the scene of FIG. 38A (d), the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol temporarily stops in the scene of FIG. 38A (e). Then, in the scene shown in FIG. 38A (f), all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (revariably displayed).

  In (f) of FIG. 38A, an arrow Y2 on which characters of “Intense heat” are drawn is displayed at the upper left part of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 38A (a) to FIG. 38A (f) are common effects that are executed in common by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 38B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (f) of FIG. 38B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and enters the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. The scene in (h) of FIG. 38B is a scene in which the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In addition, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 38B, the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 38B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of “extremely thick”, a chance symbol appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and the scene of (j) of FIG. Then, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is determined as the reach state without temporarily stopping the chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C.

  39A and 39B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 39A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 39B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. 39A and 39B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 39A and 39B show a successful effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (change present (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation example shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B is different from the display operation example shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B in the reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In FIG. 39A, active display AH (active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) is displayed in the active display area AHA. This is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 39A, after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 39A, the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. This is a scene where the arrow Y2 is displayed. From FIG. 39A (a) to FIG. 39A (c) are common effects that are executed in common by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 39A, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 39B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and the active display frame AHW is displayed. It is a scene of a collision. The scene of (e) of FIG. 39A is a scene where the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW has changed as the display mode of “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of FIG. 39B (e), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a display state in which the variable display state of the decorative symbols is different from the reach state.

  In the scene of FIG. 39A (f), the chance symbol described as “Opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol temporarily stops in the scene of FIG. 39B (g). Then, in the scene of (h) in FIG. 39B, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display). In the scene of (i) of FIG. 39B, the pseudo-continuous variation is finished, and the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state.

  40A and 40B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 40A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 40B are obtained by arranging the scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIGS. 40A and 40B, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 40A and 40B show the success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) shown in FIG. "Extremely thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B in the reach establishment timing. Since other than that is the same, it demonstrates centering on a different part. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In FIG. 40A, active display AH (active display in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started) is displayed in the active display area AHA. This is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 40A, after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 40A, the characters “Intense heat” are drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. This is a scene where the arrow Y2 is displayed. 40A (a) to FIG. 40A (c) are common effects that are executed in common by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 40A, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 40B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and enters the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. The scene in (e) of FIG. 40A is a scene in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In addition, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 40B, the variable display state of a decoration symbol is a reach state.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 40A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol temporarily stops in the scene of (g) of FIG. 40B. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 40B, all temporarily stopped decorative symbols are again variably displayed (re-variable display). In the scene of (i) of FIG. 40B, the pseudo-continuous variation ends and the decorative symbol variable display state is the reach state.

  Here, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, there are (e) in FIG. 40A and (i) in FIG. 40B as examples of scenes in which the variable display state of the decorative symbols is in the reach state, as shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B. In addition, when the quasi-continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 31 is handled as the timing (i) in FIG. 40B. That is, the reach establishment in FIG. 40A and FIG. 40B is the scene of (i) in FIG. 40B in which the quasi-continuous variation ends and the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  In FIGS. 33 to 40, the success effect can be executed at the timing when the active display change effect (the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect) is executed. When the degree of expectation is different, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the fluctuation, the expectation is executed at the second timing. This means that the degree of expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect can be executed is high.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the first start prize storage display area 5HL, and the second start prize storage display area. 5HR, a first hold indicator 51A and a second hold indicator 51B are provided. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information) in an identifiable manner (the first hold memory is stored). The first hold display is performed. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display is performed in the same manner as the first hold indicator 25A. In the first hold display 51A, the first hold display is performed in the same manner as the first hold display 25A and the first start winning storage display area 5HL. In addition, the second hold display is performed in the second hold indicator 25B, the second start winning memory display area 5HR, and the second hold indicator 51B. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are controlled by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. Further, the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the second start prize storage display area 5HR, the first hold indicator 51A, and the second hold indicator 51B are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. The With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the recognition of presence / absence of reserved storage.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, during execution of variable display, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display AH or an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH) is predetermined. Special image display means that can be displayed in the area (for example, active display area AHA) (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S531), and the display mode of the corresponding display is changed during the variable display. Common effects executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect before the figure group Y1 collides with the active display, the second system, etc. In the change production, the production until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display) and the common production was executed. Successful effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect of changing to the display mode of the star when one of the shapes “star” of the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display or In the second system change effect, an effect that the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame changes, and both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed. For example, an effect that changes the display mode such as active display or active display frame) or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, any shape “ The arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame in an effect that disappears before the “star” figure collides and the display mode of the active display does not change, or in the second system change effect. When the arrow Y2 disappears and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, or both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, either the active display or the active display frame or An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an active display change effect) that can execute both of the display modes and the like. , Timing 1 to timing 4, etc.), the ratio of executing the successful effect varies depending on at which timing the common effect is executed (see, for example, FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can pay attention to the execution timing of the common effect that determines whether the display mode of the active display AH or the active display frame AHW corresponding to the variable display is changed. Further, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 32, an effect of rotating the versatile writer 54 in front of the image display device 5 is executed, and the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start When the winning memory display area 5HR is hidden by the light emission afterimage of the LED 545A, the first hold display and the second hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display 51B are maintained. As described above, the first hold display in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start-winning memory display area 5HR are erased with the execution of the effect of rotating the versatile writer 54 in front of the image display device 5. However, since the first hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B are maintained, the player can grasp the presence or absence of the hold storage, and the player's Misidentification can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to use an accessory such as the versa writer 54 without considering whether or not the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H (first start winning storage display area 5HL, second start winning storage display area 5HR) is erased. Since it is possible to execute an effect using, the degree of freedom of the effect can be improved.

  Note that “the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H is erased” means that the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H cannot be visually recognized due to the operation of the accessory such as the versatile writer 54 as shown in the above embodiment. Or, in addition to the case where it becomes difficult to visually recognize, an effect using the entire display area of the image display device 5, an effect acting on the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H, and an effect in which the entire display area of the image display device 5 becomes dark. When the on-hold display in the start-winning memory display area 5H becomes invisible or difficult to view due to the execution of an effect that temporarily erases the on-hold display in the start-winning memory display area 5H, etc. 5 and the first lamp 9 emits light, etc., the start winning memory display area 5H That the visibility of the hold display is also included a case where decrease.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2 (B), the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E. Are provided on the display substrate 51K. As described above, the first holding display 51A, the second holding display 51B, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E are arranged on a common electric component such as one display substrate 51K and integrated. By doing so, the production cost can be reduced. In addition, since the first hold display 51A, the second hold display 51B, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E can be confirmed together, it is easy to grasp the display on each display. Note that “arranged on common electrical components” includes, for example, a unit (packaged) including a holding display and a fourth symbol display in addition to the display substrate 51K. By using the electrical parts, it is included that the on-hold indicator and the 4th symbol display are arranged on the same electrical part.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2B, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are provided on the display substrate 51K. Thus, the production cost can be reduced by integrating the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B. In addition, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B can be checked together, it is easy to grasp the display on each display.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are more than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. , Provided at a position close to the image display device 5. That is, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than Thus, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are closer to the image display device 5 than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, it is easy to grasp the hold memory.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the information display unit 51 that is a decoration of the image display device 5 is provided near the upper side of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The information display unit 51 includes a first hold indicator 51A and a second hold indicator 51B. Thus, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are provided in the information display unit 51 provided near the upper side of the image display device 5, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 51B are provided. It becomes closer to the image display device 5 than the display 25B, and it becomes easy to grasp the reserved storage.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (B), the first hold indicator 51A has a light emission mode when it is “hold hold” where the first special figure game is held. The number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations stored is in a red lighting state in which the LEDs are lit in red. As shown in FIG. 4 (C), the 4th symbol display 51D configures the 4th symbol display 51D as the light emission mode when the “1st special symbol is changing” during execution of the first special symbol game. The red LED blinks red. The second hold indicator 51B is lit blue so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold memory lights in blue as the light emission mode when the second special figure game is on hold. It becomes a state. As shown in FIG. 4 (C), the 4th symbol display 51E configures the 4th symbol display 51E as a light emission mode when the second special symbol game is being executed. The LED to be turned is in a blue blinking state in which the LED blinks in blue. In this way, the first hold indicator 51A and the fourth symbol display 51D can emit and display in red, which is a common emission color, and the second hold indicator 51B and the fourth symbol indicator 51E can mutually Light emission can be displayed in blue, which is a common light emission color. Therefore, there is a relationship between the hold display and the 4th symbol, and it becomes easy to grasp the hold memory.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (B), the first hold indicator 51A has a light emission mode when it is “hold hold” where the first special figure game is held. The number of LEDs corresponding to the number of first special figure reservations stored is in a red lighting state in which the LEDs are lit in red. As shown in FIG. 4A, the first hold indicator 25A has a number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the first special figure hold memory as the light emission mode when the hold of the first special figure game is “pending”. The red light is turned on. The second hold indicator 51B is lit blue so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold memory lights in blue as the light emission mode when the second special figure game is on hold. It becomes a state. As shown in FIG. 4A, the second hold indicator 25B has a number of LEDs corresponding to the number of second special figure hold storage as the light emission mode when the second special figure game is on hold. Is in a blue lighting state in which is lit blue. As described above, the first hold indicator 51A and the first hold indicator 25A can emit and display in red, which is a common emission color, and the second hold indicator 51B and the second hold indicator 25B can mutually be displayed. Light emission can be displayed in blue, which is a common light emission color. Therefore, the hold display is related and the hold storage is easily grasped.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

(Modification)
The display mode of the hold display does not have to be a display mode representing the degree of expectation for the jackpot as shown in FIG. 26, and the normal mode which is a normal (default, initial color) display mode and a special mode different from the normal mode And a first special mode and a second special mode which are different from the normal mode and the special mode. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41, 42, and 43.

  For example, instead of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display illustrated in FIG. 26, another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display illustrated in FIG. 41 may be used. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables corresponding to the change categories. FIG. 41A shows the hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening / non-reach loss)” or the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by a determination table. FIG. 41B shows an example of setting the display ratio of the hold display by the hold display form determination table selected when the change category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL2). FIG. 41C shows setting of a display mode determination ratio of the hold display mode by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (lost))” among the above seven types. This is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 41D shows an example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (losing)) among the above seven types. 41E shows the display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the change category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. 41 is a setting example (H-TBL5) of an aspect determination ratio, and Fig. 41 (F) shows a hold selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types. Fig. 41G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the display mode determination ratio of the hold display by the display mode determination table, and Fig. 41 (G) shows the variation category "PB5 (superly) among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when “H β (big hit))”.

  When FIG. 41 and FIG. 26 are compared, a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table in FIG. 26 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each hold display mode determination table is 4: 1 for the determination ratio for “white” and the determination ratio for “gray” in each hold display mode determination table of FIG. This is a setting example in which a determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the jackpot as the normal mode, but when the “gray” hold display becomes the active display, the ratio of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is It is a display mode representing high.

  Also, in the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode). Unlike the aspect and the special aspect, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than that of the first special aspect). A red color or the like that is a third special mode with a different level of expectation (for example, a higher level of expectation for jackpot than the second special mode) may be included.

  For example, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 uses a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 41 based on the change category specified by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11. A hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. What is necessary is just to determine the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to display.

  Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S160). S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start prize corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize received command buffer 194A. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  Then, after executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determining process (step S160) (the first start winning reception command buffer 194A concerned). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning prize), a new hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. A first hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start-winning memory display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as a use pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set presentation control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold presentation The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning prize storage display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 28, when determining whether to execute an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the change, or when executing an active display change effect, In the case of the process for determining whether to execute the active display change effect, or the active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, the process for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed, Processing for determining the timing for executing the active display change effect, processing for setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to the change, and a process for determining which active display change effect to execute when executing an active display change effect will be described. To do. When the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 41 is used, the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. 42 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 29 and the determination ratio setting example based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is a special mode, the setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table is different.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating another setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 42A is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray). FIG. 42B is a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode (gray). Each setting example shown in FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 29, whether or not the active display change effect is executed, and when the active display change effect is executed. It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | generation aspect of an active display change production.

  Each setting example shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effects in the active display change effect execution determination table. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “execution present” and “execution non-execution”, respectively, at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, respectively. In the “execution present” in the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute active display change effect is “first system”. 42A and FIG. 42B are determined for each of “change effect”, “second system change effect”, and “first system change effect and second system change effect”. Assigned in percentage.

  “Execution present” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. “Execution” and “first system change effect and second system change effect” indicate that both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are active display changes. Indicates that it is performed as a production. “No execution” indicates that no active display change effect is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is a fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 42, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern PA1-X, PA2-X, “no execution” is 100. %, Indicating that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. In addition, when an active display change effect is executed (in the case of “Execution” in FIGS. 42A and 42B), when reaching a hot reach (for example, super reach), a reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach). ) Is higher than the second system change effect than the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of the first system change effect being executed is higher than that when the variation pattern is “losing” than the second system change effect. In addition, when the reach becomes hot (for example, super reach), the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the variation pattern is “losing”.

  In addition, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the determination ratio of whether or not the active display change effect is executed differs, and when the active display corresponding to the variation is in a special mode, the variation Compared with the case where the active display corresponding to is not in a special mode, the determination ratio at which the active display change effect is executed is higher.

  In addition, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 29 is not considered, the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 42A is considered, and the active display corresponding to the change is not the special mode, and FIG. In consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 42, when the active display corresponding to the variation is a special mode, the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. 29, the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution presence determination table shown in FIG. 29 and the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution determination table shown in FIG. ing.

  In other words, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is designated by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random number MR7 for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute an active display change effect according to the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when executing an active display change effect, Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined as “executed”, the “first system change effect”, the “second system change effect”, or the “first system change effect”. And “second system change effect” may be determined.

  Note that the graphic group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the degree of expectation for the big hit changes depending on the combination of the graphic elements constituting the graphic group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio based on the first system detail pattern determination table when the first system change effect is executed. In each setting example shown in FIG. 43, the first system detail pattern determination table of the first system change effect includes, for example, 10 types of first system detail patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. The first system detail pattern is a case where only the first system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 30A is determined), and the first system change effect. Reference is made when both the second system change effect is executed (when any of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 30C is determined).

  In the first system detail pattern, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detail pattern is determined by an active display change effect pattern as shown in FIG. Assigned.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores a first system detail pattern as an effect mode of 10 types of first system change effects according to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 43, the first system detail pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are all composed of triangles. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when reaching a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 30, and when reaching a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach), The determination ratio determined for the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is reached. Further, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is determined by the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 30, and the first system details that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined variation A pattern is determined.

  Similarly, the first system detail pattern “SHP2” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of pentagons, triangles, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP3” This is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP4” has three figures constituting the figure group Y1 as pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP5” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are constituted by stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern “SH” "7" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detail pattern "SHP8" has three figures constituting the figure group Y1. This is an effect pattern when composed of stars, stars, triangles and triangles. The first system detail pattern “SHP9” is an effect when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars and pentagons. The first system detail pattern “SHP10” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars. According to the example shown in the drawing, the degree of expectation that a successful effect can be executed differs depending on the combination of figures constituting the figure group Y1.

  In addition, when considering a special aspect as shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, when performing an active display change effect with respect to the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in a special aspect, the common effect mentioned above is performed. It may be executed as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect, or an suggestion effect that suggests an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special manner (for example, a success effect and a failure effect) You may make it perform the suggestion production | presentation which suggests the common production | presentation performed in common with production in the same or different aspect.

  In addition, when considering a special mode as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is a special mode. In some cases, a hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

  In FIG. 43, in the figure group Y1 constituted by the initial display (combination), the figure to be erased in the common effect may be erased from the figure that is the display mode of the active display with low expectation. For example, when the first system detail pattern SHP6 is determined as a successful effect, the display mode after the successful effect is executed among the graphic group composed of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (for example, “pentagon”), the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “triangle”) is erased first, and the figure with the low expectation level (for example, “star”) is then erased. However, if it is a failure production, among the group of figures composed of three figures, "star", "pentagon", and "triangle", "triangle", "pentagon", and "star" It may be deleted.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect can be executed may include before and after the reach display mode that constitutes a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after reach establishment).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is performed at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display as compared with the case where the common effect is performed at the first timing of variable display of the identification information being executed. In the case of execution, the rate at which the success effect is executed may be higher.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, prior determination means for deciding whether or not to use the specific display result before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display (for example, in the processing of step S412 by the CPU 103, the special figure display result and the pending storage) 19 is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 19, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. In the winning random number determination process in step S220, a special figure display result, a process for determining the jackpot type, etc.), and before the determination by the predetermining means, stored in the holding storage means Specific determination means for determining whether or not the variable display result based on the hold information is the specific display result (for example, step S1) In the special symbol normal processing of 0, processing for determining whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed) The execution execution means capable of executing the hold notice effect that displays the hold display corresponding to the hold information that is the determination target of the specific determination means in any one of a plurality of display forms, and the display form of the hold display A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating whether or not to change, the display mode of the hold display is a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, the normal mode and the special mode Including the first special mode and the second special mode, which are different from the mode, the effect execution unit becomes the determination target of the specific determination unit at a different rate according to the determination result of the specific determination unit Pending information Is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and the display is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings. The suggestion effect executing means may execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. Good.

  According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the execution frequency of the suggestion effect can be increased, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

  In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. However, the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. May be.

  Moreover, after the hold display is displayed in a special manner as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, for example, the execution ratio for executing the above-described common effect as a suggestive effect that suggests a successful effect and a failed effect is different. After the hold display is displayed in a special manner, the suggestion effect that suggests the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, the success effect and the failure effect are common) For example, it may be set higher so that the execution ratio of executing the suggestion effect that suggests the common effect to be executed in the same or different manner is different. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 is a special mode, the active display change effect with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode For example, it may be made higher so that the execution ratio for executing the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode is different.

  In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect has been described. However, if the main notice effect is not affected, the notice effect such as another main notice effect or the pre-read notice effect is executed with the same variation. Alternatively, if the main notice effect such as other main notice effects or pre-read notice effects is not affected, the main notice effect may be executed with the same fluctuation. Here, the case where there is no influence means that the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change when executing a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) in the change. Or when a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed in the variation, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect form of each notice effect.

  In the above description, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. For example, a character with a hammer appears as a hold effect with respect to the hold display, and an action effect is performed by hitting the first hold display with a hammer. This is a decorative design when the display mode of the hold display is changed, or when the decorative design is composed of a total of nine types of eight types of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” and one character image. It may be an effect mode in which the character jumps out of the character image and the action effect is executed on the target hold display.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, it is determined whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on a setting example based on the display mode determination table of the hold display as illustrated in FIG. 26 or FIG. 41, and the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing for changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as next fluctuation.

  In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a graphic group constituted by a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame is indicated by an arrow. However, it does not have to be a graphic or an arrow. For example, it is an effect that changes the display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame by making a character appear. Also good.

  In the above description, an example in which the display mode of the hold display to be additionally displayed (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described. However, like the setting example based on the hold display mode determination table as illustrated in FIGS. For example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in either four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed according to the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, and the color of the hold display or the hold display is drawn. The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by characters or symbols, or the hold display may be displayed so as to be additionally displayed according to the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.) Display mode May be constant, hold display of motion (for example, the operation pattern of the character in the hold display of character) may determine the hold display of the display mode to be added displayed by like.

  In the above description, the active display may be deleted from the image display device 5 immediately before the decorative symbol final stop, or the active display is deleted when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

  In the above description, after executing a common effect on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is successfully changed. Although the example which performs the failure production which does not change the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the production and the hold display corresponding to the variable display has been described, After executing a common effect that is executed in common between the success effect and the failure effect for any of the above, execute the success effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and the failure effect that does not change the display mode of the hold display May be.

  In addition, after performing a success or failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display corresponds to the hold display. A success effect or a failure effect may be further executed on the special image including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, each of the hold displays displayed in the start prize storage display area 5H in step 160 or step 163 in FIG. On the other hand, the presence / absence of execution of the success or failure effect for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variable category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display. As shown in FIG. 12, the success / failure performance execution / non-execution of the special image representing the information including the active display at that time, the display mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. are determined according to the variation category. What is necessary is just to memorize | store the determined content in the 1st prefetch notice buffer 194C and the 2nd prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character “super heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, A character may be drawn, or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect depends on which of the second system change effects is selected among the plurality of types of second system change effects. The expected degree of execution may be different. Further, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests a display mode of the special image after execution of the successful effect by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

  In addition, for example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, a hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. If there is a hold display displayed in a special manner in any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, either the hold display displayed in the start win memory display area 5H, or A hold change effect or an active display change effect may be executed for the active display.

  For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of active display in the active display mode. In this case, for example, the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the line thickness of the active display frame are displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so as to be a display mode of a color with a high expectation level of the big hit (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) compared to the color of the hold display that has been displayed The color at may be changed.

  For example, the active display color included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA has different expectations for the execution of the success effect, for example, for each color of the active display, FIGS. A setting example of the determination ratio of the production mode set as shown in (C) may be used, and a successful production for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. An example of setting the display mode determination ratio that is set so that the display ratio of the active display such as the color of the active display after the display is different may be used.

  For example, 45% like the “executed” and “not executed” ratios of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X” in the setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change effect execution determination table in FIG. (The sum of the first system change effect 15%, the second system change effect 10%, the first system change effect 20%, and the second system change effect 20%) A ratio may be set for each, or the ratio of “executed” and “not executed” is 0% to 100% as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. 29. The ratio according to the form may be set such that one of a plurality is set as 0%.

  For example, in the probability change control, a gaming machine that provides a specific area in the special winning opening in advance and controls the game to a certain probability state based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area. For example, based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, a game ball enters a specific area within the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. It may be a gaming machine that controls to an easy gaming state and controls to a probable change state based on the passing of the game ball through this specific area.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 are provided on the right side portion of the game area in the game board 2, For example, the hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B may be provided at the positions shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 44, a guide rail 10 surrounding the game area in the game board 2 is provided. The guide rail 10 has an inner rail 10a and an outer rail 10b. A game ball fired from a predetermined ball striking device enters a game area through a passage formed between the inner rail 10a and the outer rail 10b while being guided by the inner rail 10a and the outer rail 10b. It becomes. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B shown in FIG. 44 are disposed outside the outer rail 10b of the guide rail 10. Further, the first hold indicator 51 </ b> A and the second hold indicator 51 </ b> B controlled by the effect control board 12 are arranged on the inner side of the inner rail 10 a of the guide rail 10. In this way, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12 are arranged. Accordingly, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is between the image display device 5, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than the distance. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 44, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may also be disposed outside the outer rail 10b of the guide rail 10, or the first special symbol display device. About 4A and the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 4B, you may arrange | position inside the inner rail 10a of the guide rail 10. FIG.

  In the above embodiment, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 is four as shown in FIG. The number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B to be controlled was four. However, the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator is not limited to four. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is set to two, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are formed. The number of LEDs may be two each. The two LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A are referred to as LED 25Aa and LED 25Ab, and the two LEDs constituting the second hold indicator 25B are referred to as LED 25Ba and LED 25Bb. Further, the two LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 51A are referred to as LED 51Aa and LED 51Ab, and the two LEDs constituting the second hold indicator 51B are referred to as LED 51Ba and LED 51Bb.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a light emission example, blinking timing, and the like of the hold indicator when the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator is two. “Hold 0” shown in FIG. 46 (A) indicates that the special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number) is 0, and “hold 1” The figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number) is 1, and “hold 3” indicates the special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number or the first special figure hold memory number). (2 special figure reserved memory number) is 3, and "hold 4" indicates that the special figure reserved memory number (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number) is 4. .

  When the number of first special figure hold memory is 0 (when “hold 0”), the LED 25Aa and LED 25Ab of the first hold indicator 25A are used as the light emission modes of the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold indicator 51A. In addition, the LED 51Aa and the LED 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A are both turned off. Note that “extinguishing” means that the LED is off. Further, when the second special figure reservation storage number is 0 (when “hold 0”), the LED 25Ba of the second hold indicator 25B is used as the light emission mode of the second hold indicator 25B and the second hold indicator 51B. LED25Bb and LED51Ba and LED51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B are all turned off.

  When the number of the first special figure hold memory is 1 (when “hold 1”), the LED 25Aa of the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold indicator 25A are used as the light emission modes of the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold indicator 51A. The LED 51Aa of the first hold indicator 51A is lit in red, and the LED 25Ab of the first hold indicator 25A and the LED 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A are turned off. Note that lighting means that the LED is on. Further, when the second special figure reserved memory number is 1 (when “hold 1”), the LED 25Ba of the second hold indicator 25B is used as the light emission mode of the second hold indicator 25B and the second hold indicator 51B. The LED 51Ba of the second hold indicator 51B is lit in blue, and the LED 25Bb of the second hold indicator 25B and the LED 51Bb of the first hold indicator 51B are turned off. Note that the first hold indicator 25A, 51A and the second hold indicator 25B, 51B differ only in whether the emission color is red or blue, and in the following, the second hold indicator 25B, 51B. The description about is omitted.

  When the first special figure reserved memory number is 2 (“hold 2”), the LEDs 25Aa, 25Ab, 51Aa, 51Ab are lit in red as the light emission mode of the first hold indicators 25A, 51A. When the first special figure reservation storage number is 3 (when “hold 3”), as the light emission mode of the first hold indicator 25A, 51A, the LED 25Aa, 51Aa blinks red, and the LED 25Ab, 51Ab Lights red. Note that blinking means that the LED repeats an on / off state at a predetermined cycle. When the first special figure reservation storage number is 4 (when “hold 4”), the LEDs 25Aa, 25Ab, 51Aa, and 51Ab blink in red as light emission modes of the first hold indicators 25A and 51A.

  The blinking cycle (flashing cycle) of the LEDs 25Aa and 25Ab of the first hold indicator 25A and the blink cycle of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A may be the same or different. Good. FIG. 46B shows the blinking timing of the hold indicator when the blinking periods are different. As shown in FIG. 46B, the blinking cycle of the first hold indicator 25A (flashing cycle of the LEDs 25Aa and 25Ab) is T1, and the blinking cycle of the first hold indicator 51A (flashing of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab). (Period) is T2. Here, as an example, the blinking cycle T2 is longer than the blinking cycle T1. Note that the blinking cycle T1 may be longer than the blinking cycle T2. In order to make the blink period T1 of the first hold indicator 25A different from the blink period T2 of the first hold indicator 51A, for example, the blink period T1 is set using the control clock of the main board 11 and blinks. The period T2 may be set using the control clock of the effect control board 12. Since the 4th symbol display 51D and the like are controlled by the effect control board 12, the blinking cycle of the 4th symbol display 51D and the like may be matched with the blinking cycle of the first hold indicator 51A and the like. In this way, the blinking cycle T1 is set using the control clock of the main board 11, and the blinking cycle T2 is set using the control clock of the effect control board 12, and the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold display are set. The flashing periods of the devices 51A may be different from each other. As a result, the main board 11 that controls the first hold indicator 25A and the like, and the effect control board 12 that controls the first hold indicator 51A and the like can be controlled to blink while maintaining the mutual control clock, so that the control burden Can be suppressed.

  Moreover, when blinking the plurality of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12, the blinking of the plurality of LEDs may be synchronized. FIG. 47 shows the blinking timing of each LED when the blinking of a plurality of LEDs is synchronized. Note that the timing at which the game ball passes through the first start winning opening is different from the timing at which the game ball passes through the second start winning opening. As shown in FIG. 47, at timing t1, the first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) is made for the first special game. Occur. The LED 51Aa is lit until the timing t1, and starts blinking from the timing t1. At timing t2, the second start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, and a third hold (hold 3) is generated for the second special game. The LED 51Ba starts blinking in synchronization with the timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off after the timing t2. That is, the LED 51Ba blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa.

  Subsequently, at timing t3, the first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening, and the fourth hold (hold 4) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Ab starts blinking in synchronization with the timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off at a timing after the timing t3. That is, the LED 51Ab blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa. At timing t4, the second start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, and a fourth hold (hold 4) is generated for the second special figure game. The LED 51Bb starts blinking in synchronization with the timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off after the timing t4. That is, the LED 51Bb blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa. Accordingly, the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B blink in synchronization with each other. Thus, when blinking the plurality of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12, the control burden is suppressed by synchronizing the blinking of the plurality of LEDs. In addition, the appearance can be improved. Note that any of the blinking cycles of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B may be different. However, when the blinking cycles of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B are different from each other, the LEDs of each hold indicator are visually irregular. Since the player is paying attention to the light emission mode, the image display device 5 or the like impedes the performance. Accordingly, by synchronizing the blinking of the plurality of LEDs, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the rendering effect due to the image display device 5 or the like.

  Moreover, when blinking LED which comprises the 1st hold | maintenance display 51A etc. which are controlled by the production control board 12, and 4th symbol display 51D (LED) etc. which are controlled by the production control board 12, it is mutually. The blinking may or may not be synchronized. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the blinking timing of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, when the variation (variable display) of the first special symbol game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking. The 4th symbol display 51D is turned off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. The first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening at timing t2, and a third hold (hold 3) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Aa starts blinking from the timing t2. The LED 51Aa is lit until the timing t2, and the LED 51Aa starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at the timing t2. After timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are asynchronous. That is, at the timing t3 when the fourth hold (hold 4) occurs for the first special figure game, the timing t4 when the fluctuation of the first special figure game stops, and the timing t5 when the fluctuation of the first special figure game starts again. However, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are not synchronized. In this way, when the LEDs constituting the hold display 51A and the like and the fourth symbol display 51D are blinked, the control burden on the effect control board 12 can be suppressed by not synchronizing the blinking of each other. Moreover, since LED which comprises holding | maintenance display 51A etc. and 4th symbol display 51D blink independently, an external appearance can be improved.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), when the variation (variable display) of the first special symbol game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking. The 4th symbol display 51D is turned off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. The first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening at timing t2, and a third hold (hold 3) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Aa starts blinking from the timing t2. The LED 51Aa is lit until the timing t2, and the LED 51Aa starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at the timing t2. At timing t3, the first start condition is established based on the passing of the game ball through the first start winning opening, and the fourth hold (hold 4) occurs for the first special figure game. At timing t4 when the variation of the special figure game stops, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are not synchronized. When the variation of the first special figure game starts again at the timing t5, the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking. The LED 51Aa starts blinking again at the timing after the timing t5 and at the timing when the fourth symbol display 51D is turned off. That is, the LED 51Aa blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D. Thus, even when the LED 51Aa starts blinking without being synchronized with the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D when a hold occurs during the fluctuation, the LED 51Aa is at the timing when the next fluctuation starts. And the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D may be synchronized. Thus, by synchronizing the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D at the timing when the next variation starts, the control burden on the effect control board 12 can be suppressed and the next variation occurs. The appearance after starting can be improved.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48C, when the variation (variable display) of the first special symbol game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking. The 4th symbol display 51D is turned off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. The first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening at timing t2, and a third hold (hold 3) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Aa starts blinking at a timing after the timing t2 and in accordance with the timing when the fourth symbol display 51D is turned off. That is, the LED 51Aa blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D. After timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are synchronized. When the fluctuation stops and the 4th symbol display 51D is off, the LED 51Aa is continuously blinking. When the fluctuation starts again and the 4th symbol display 51D starts blinking, Blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D. In this way, the appearance can be improved by synchronizing the blinking of the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 and the blinking of the fourth symbol display.

  Further, the blinking cycle of the LED 25Aa of the first hold indicator 25A and the blinking cycle of the fourth symbol display 51D may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the blinking cycle of the fourth symbol display 51D is T3, and the blinking cycle of the LED 25Aa of the first hold indicator 25A is T4. Here, as an example, the blinking cycle T4 is longer than the blinking cycle T3. Note that the blinking cycle T3 may be longer than the blinking cycle T4. In order to make the blink cycle T3 of the 4th symbol display 51D different from the blink cycle T4 of the first hold indicator 51A, for example, using the control clock of the effect control board 12, the control clock per cycle The blinking periods T3 and T4 may be set so that the number of clocks is different. In this case, for example, when the variation (variable display) of the first special symbol game starts at the timing t1, the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking. The first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening at timing t2, and a third hold (hold 3) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Aa starts blinking from the timing t2. After timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are asynchronous because their blinking periods are different. In this way, when the LEDs constituting the hold display 51A and the like and the 4th symbol display 51D are blinked, the control load on the effect control board 12 is suppressed by not synchronizing with different blinking periods. Can do. Further, since the LEDs constituting the hold indicator 51A and the like and the fourth symbol display 51D blink independently, it becomes easy to recognize each blink.

  In the above embodiment, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided as shown in FIG. 1, but instead of these, for example, the normal winning ball device 60 shown in FIG. 49 may be provided. Good. For example, the normal winning ball device 60 is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The normal winning ball device 60 forms an approach passage that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. A distribution member 60C that distributes game balls to the left and right is provided below the entry passage. The distribution member 60 </ b> C only needs to be configured to distribute the game balls that have flowed down the approach passage alternately to the left and right, for example. A first start winning opening 60A is provided on the lower left side of the distribution member 60C. A second start winning opening 60B is provided at the lower right of the distribution member 60C. Thus, the first start winning opening 60A and the second start winning opening 60B are provided inside the normal winning ball apparatus 60.

  In the normal winning ball device 60, a first out port for discharging the game ball from the normal winning ball device 60 without entering the first starting winning port 60A is provided above the first starting winning port 60A. It may be done. In addition, a second out port for discharging the game ball from the normal winning ball device 60 without entering the second starting winning port 60B is provided above the second starting winning port 60B inside the normal winning ball device 60. It may be done. However, neither the first out port nor the second out port has a ball receiving member or the like, and the game ball falling toward the first start winning port 60A and the second starting winning port 60B is the first out. The probability of entering the mouth and the second out mouth may be formed to be sufficiently lower than the probability of not entering. Although not shown in FIG. 49, a configuration corresponding to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B shown in FIG. 1 may be separately provided in the configuration of FIG.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display is suspended when the game ball enters (starts winning) the first starting winning port 60A or the second starting winning port 60B provided in the normal winning ball device 60. Based on the above. For example, a special game start condition (first start) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening 60A. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established when the (condition) is established, the first special figure holding memory number is 1 is added (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening 60B occurs, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start) If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied when the (condition) is satisfied, the second special figure holding storage number is 1 is added (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended.

  As described above, the game balls that have flowed down the approach passage by the sorting member 60C are alternately distributed to the left and right, and are alternately held for the first special game and the second special game. It is easy to become. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR are not provided, and the same start of the hold display for the first special game and the second special game is started. When it is performed in the winning memory display area, it is possible to easily grasp (confirm) each number of reserved memories.

  In the above embodiment, only the 4th symbol display that flashes when the special game is executed is provided. However, the 4th symbol display that flashes when the normal game is executed is further provided. May be. Further, as the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12, only the hold display for performing the hold display for the special game is provided, but the hold display for performing the hold display for the ordinary game is further provided. May be provided. FIG. 50 shows a hold display in the case where a fourth symbol display 51F that blinks when a general game is being executed and a general figure hold display 51G for performing a hold display for the general game is provided. The example of arrangement | positioning of a container and a 4th symbol display is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50A, the LEDs 51Ga to 51Gd of the general-purpose hold display 51G are arranged on the display substrate 51K, and the fourth symbol display 51F is also arranged on the display substrate 51K. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 50B, in addition to the display substrate 51K, a display substrate 51J is provided, and the LEDs 51Ga to 51Gd of the general-purpose hold display 51G are arranged on the display substrate 51J, and the fourth The symbol display 51F may also be disposed on the display substrate 51J. The other electrical components are the same as those in the above embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. As described above, the common figure holding display 51G and the fourth symbol display 51F are arranged on a common electric component such as one display board 51K and display board 51J and integrated to reduce production costs. be able to. Moreover, since the common figure hold | maintenance display 51G and the 4th symbol display 51F can be confirmed collectively, the grasp of the display in each display becomes easy.

  In the above embodiment, the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the fourth symbol indicator 51D, and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged as shown in FIG. You may arrange | position as shown in the arrangement example different from arrangement | positioning as shown to (B), for example, the example of arrangement | positioning of the holding | maintenance display of FIG. 51, and a 4th symbol display. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are arranged on the left side of the image display device 5 and the right side of the image display device 5, for example. The two hold indicators 51B may be arranged at intervals.

  In the arrangement example of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol display shown in FIG. 51A, the fourth symbol display 51D and the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A are arranged in a vertical line. Moreover, LED4Ba-51Bd of the 4th symbol display 51E and the 2nd holding | maintenance display 51B are arranged in a vertical line. In this way, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator relating to the same special figure game may be arranged in a line. As a result, the hold display device and the fourth symbol display device relating to the same special figure game can be confirmed together, and the display on each display device can be easily grasped. In addition to arranging the hold display and the 4th symbol display in a vertical row, the hold display and the 4th symbol display are in the vicinity (vertical 1 row) such as a horizontal row, a diagonal row, and adjacent rows. And the horizontal display, the horizontal display, the horizontal display, the adjacent display, etc.), the hold display and the fourth symbol display can be confirmed together, and the display on each display can be easily grasped.

  In the arrangement example of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol display shown in FIG. 51 (B), the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the fourth symbol display 51D and the first hold indicator 51A are arranged in a vertical line. The LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the fourth symbol display 51E and the second holding display 51B are arranged in a vertical line. In this example, the light emission mode of the hold indicator is the same as that in the case where the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator shown in FIG. 46 is two. Further, the fourth symbol display 51D and the fourth symbol display 51E are in a horizontal row, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are in a horizontal row. Thereby, since the 4th symbol display regarding different special figure games can be checked collectively, the grasp of the display in each display becomes easy. In addition, since it is possible to collectively check the holding indicators related to different special drawing games, it is easy to grasp the display on each indicator. Even in this case, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator relating to the same special game can be confirmed together.

  In the arrangement example of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol display shown in FIG. 51 (C), the fourth symbol display 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged in a vertical line. The LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B are arranged in a vertical line. In this example as well, the light emission mode of the hold indicator is the same as when the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator shown in FIG. 46 is two. Further, the fourth symbol display 51D and the first hold indicator 51A are in a horizontal row, and the fourth symbol display 51E and the second hold indicator 51B are in a horizontal row. Thereby, since the 4th symbol display regarding different special figure games can be checked collectively, the grasp of the display in each display becomes easy. In addition, since it is possible to collectively check the holding indicators related to different special drawing games, it is easy to grasp the display on each indicator. Even in this case, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator relating to the same special game can be confirmed together.

  In the above embodiment, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 is four as shown in FIG. The number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B to be controlled was four. As a modified example, as shown in FIG. 45, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is two, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator The number of LEDs constituting 51B was two each. In addition, for example, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is 1 or 3, respectively, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are configured. The number of LEDs to be set may be one or three, respectively.

  When each display unit has one LED, as the light emission mode of the hold display, for example, when the hold memory number is 0, the LED is turned off, and when the hold memory number is 1, the LED is lit in blue to hold the hold memory. When the number is 2, the LED may blink in blue, when the reserved storage number is 3, the LED may be lit in red, and when the reserved storage number is 4, the LED may be flashed in red. Moreover, as a light emission mode of the hold indicator, for example, it may be lit or blinked in a color other than blue and red, or a light emission mode including blue, red, and a color other than these colors. As an example of a light emission mode including blue, red, and colors other than these colors, the LED is turned off when the reserved memory number is 0, the LED is lit in blue when the reserved memory number is 1, and the reserved memory number is 2. In this case, the LED may be lit in yellow, the LED may be lit in red when the reserved memory number is 3, and the LED may be lit in purple when the reserved memory number is 4.

  When the number of LEDs in each display is three, for example, as the light emission mode of the hold display, for example, when the hold memory number is 0, the three LEDs are turned off, and when the hold memory number is 1, the first LED is turned on. When the number of reserved memories is 2, the second LED is lit in blue. When the number of reserved memories is 3, the third LED is lit in blue and the number of reserved memories is 4. In this case, the three LEDs may blink in blue. In addition to controlling to increase the number of LEDs to be lit from 1 to 3 each time the number of reserved memories increases from 1 to 3, the LEDs to be lit whenever the number of stored memories increases You may control the location of When the number of reserved memories is 1, the first LED is lit in blue. When the number of reserved memories is 2, the second LED is lit in yellow. The third LED may be lit in red, and when the number of reserved storage is 4, all the three LEDs may be switched to white lighting.

  Thus, by setting the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator controlled by the main board 11 and the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator controlled by the effect control board 12 to be the same, The hold display on the hold display controlled by 11 and the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 are related to each other, and the number of hold memories can be easily grasped (confirmed).

  In addition, a hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) controlled by the main board 11 and a hold indicator (first hold indicator 51A, second hold) controlled by the effect control board 12 are displayed. The display sizes of the hold display on the display device 51B) may be different from each other. For example, the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 may be larger than the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the main board 11. This makes it easy to grasp (confirm) the number of reserved memories. The display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 may be smaller than the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the main board 11. As a result, space can be saved and the degree of freedom in designing the panel surface can be improved.

  Further, for example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power interruption) occurs, the hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR of the image display device 5, and the effect control board 12 You may adjust the display timing with the hold display in the hold display (1st hold display 51A, 2nd hold display 51B) controlled by. The adjustment of the display timing may be performed by the display control unit 123 or the presentation control CPU 120. For example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power interruption) occurs, the hold display on the hold indicator controlled by the effect control board 12 is displayed as the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR. It may be performed before the hold display at. By adjusting the display timing in this way, the hold display can be recognized quickly, and the hold memory number can be easily grasped (confirmed).

  In addition, for example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power interruption) occurs, the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12, the first start prize storage display area 5HL, and the second start prize storage display You may perform the hold display in area 5HR simultaneously. By adjusting the display timing in this way, it is not necessary to transmit a command different from the command after transmitting the command corresponding to the restoration of the power interruption, and thus it is possible to prevent the control burden from increasing.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the emission color of the first hold indicator 25A is different from the emission color of the second hold indicator 25B, and the emission color of the first hold indicator 51A is different from the second hold indicator. The luminescent color of the display 51B was made different, and the luminescent color of the fourth symbol display 51D and the luminescent color of the fourth symbol display 51E were made different. However, these luminescent colors may be the same color. For example, the light emission color of the first hold indicator 25A, the light emission color of the second hold indicator 25B, the light emission color of the first hold indicator 51A, the light emission color of the second hold indicator 51B, and the light emission of the fourth symbol display 51D. All or some of the colors and the emission colors of the fourth symbol display 51E may be the same color. If it does in this way, LED which comprises each indicator can be comprised by the single color LED of the same color, and reduction of production cost and control burden can be aimed at.

  In the above embodiment, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B configured to include, for example, four LEDs are used as the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12, but the effect control board is used. The hold indicator controlled by 12 is not limited to one including four LEDs. For example, a sub image display device may be provided outside the image display device 5 instead of the first hold display device 51A and the second hold display device 51B. In this case, in the sub-image display device, a hold display similar to the hold display in the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR of the image display device 5 may be performed by image display. This sub-image display device is a light-transmissive display device that can be viewed from the back side of a transmissive liquid crystal or the like, as disposed on the front side (player side) of the image display device 5. May be.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio of executing the successful performance is different”, for example, when performing various determinations, the ratio of any one of a plurality of determination results as the determination result is another determination. Increasing the ratio as a result may include that the ratio of one determination result is 100%, and that the ratio of another determination result is 0%. May be. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as another determination result is 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%. In this case, the ratio (predetermined ratio) as one determination result is higher than the ratio (0%) as another determination result.

  In the embodiment described above, whether or not the main board 11 is a “hit”, such as performing the winning random number determination process in the start winning determination process executed on the main board 11. I do. Then, a command designating the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, execution of a prefetch notice is determined based on a command from the main board 11. However, the determination is not limited to whether or not the main board 11 is a “big hit”. For example, on the side of the main board 11, a command indicating the random number value extracted at the time of winning is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and on the side of the effect control board 12, a “hit” is made based on the command from the main board 11. It may be determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice according to the determination result. In other words, when determining the execution of the pre-reading notice, the determination process regarding the target of the pre-reading notice may be executed on either the main board 11 or the effect control board 12.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, a game score for use in a game is given using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  The special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the special symbol display devices (the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and are specified among the plurality of LEDs during variable display of the special symbols ( Only a single LED) is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the special pattern can be obtained by maintaining the state where the LED, which has been repeatedly turned on and off, emits light in a predetermined emission color, or is kept off. Stop display. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) resulting in a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol.

  In the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (the effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of pseudo-continuous, 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... Start prize Memory display area 6A ... Normal winning ball device 6B ... Normal variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 (8L, 8R) ... Speaker 9 ... First lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 14 ... 1st lamp control board 15, 19 ... Relay board 16 ... Display drive part 17 ... 2nd lamp drive part 18 ... Accessory drive part 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... 1st start port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 51 ... Information display Part 51A ... 1st holding | maintenance display 51Aa-51Ad ... LED
51B ... 2nd holding | maintenance indicator 51Ba-51Bd ... LED
51C ... Character display 51D, 51E, 51F ... 4th symbol display 51K, 51J ... Substrate for display 51G ... Universal figure hold display 52 ... 2nd lamp 53 ... Drive mechanism 54 ... Versa writer 541 ... 3rd lamp drive part 545 ... LED group 545A ... LED
60 ... Ordinary winning ball apparatus 60A ... 1st start winning opening 60B ... 2nd starting winning opening 60C ... Distribution member 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit AH ... Active display AHW ... Active display frame AHA ... Active display area

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on information from the game control means;
Hold storage means capable of storing as variable storage for variable display that has not yet started,
Display is controlled by the game control means, a specific hold display unit for displaying the hold storage,
Image display means capable of displaying an image;
A predetermined hold display unit for displaying hold storage, the display being controlled based on information from the effect control means, provided in the image display means;
A special hold display unit provided outside the image display means, the display of which is controlled based on information from the effect control means, and for displaying a hold memory;
A gaming machine comprising: Special image display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a predetermined area during execution of the variable display;
During execution of variable display, when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed, the common effect executed in common, and the display mode of the corresponding display after executing the common effect An effect execution means capable of executing a success effect that changes or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display;
Further comprising
Of the multiple timings during the execution of the variable display, depending on which timing the common effect is executed, the ratio of executing the successful effect is different.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images